Garmin 010-02322-02 GPSMAP 1222xsv Plus Marine Chartplotter User Manual

GPSMAP

OWNER'S MANUAL

12x3, 9x3, 7x3, 12x2 Plus, 9x2 Plus, 7x2 Plus

or improve its products and to make changes in the content of this manual without obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes or improvements. Go to

www.garmin.com for current updates and supplemental information concerning the use of this product.

Garmin

, the Garmin logo, ActiveCaptain

, ANT

, Fusion

, GPSMAP

, inReach

, and VIRB

are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, registered in the USA and other countries.

ActiveCaptain

, Connect IQ

™

, ECHOMAP

™

, Fantom

™

, Fusion-Link

™

, Garmin ClearVü

™

, Garmin Connect

™

, Garmin Express

™

, Garmin Nautix

™

, Garmin Navionics Vision+

™

, Garmin

Quickdraw

™

, GC

™

, GCV

™

, GMR

™

, GRID

™

, GXM

™

, LiveScope

™

, MotionScope

™

, OneChart

™

, OneHelm

™

, Panoptix

™

, Reactor

™

, Shadow Drive

™

, SmartMode

™

, and SteadyCast

™

are

trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.

Mac

is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The BLUETOOTH

word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such

marks by Garmin is under license. CZone

™

is a trademark of Power Products, LLC. Color Thermal Vision

™

is a trademark of FLIR Systems, Inc. FLIR

and MSX

are registered

trademarks of FLIR Systems, Inc. HDMI

is a registered trademark of HDMI Licensing, LLC. Mercury

is a trademark of Brunswick Corporation. NMEA

, NMEA 2000

, and the NMEA

2000 logo are registered trademarks of the National Marine Electronics Association. microSD

and the microSD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. Optimus

, and SeaStation

are registered trademarks of Dometic

. C-Monster

and Power-Pole

are registered trademarks of JL Marine Systems, Inc. SD

and the SDHC logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.

SiriusXM

is a registered mark of Wi-Fi Alliance Corporation. Windows

is a

registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Yamaha

, the Yamaha logo, Command Link Plus

, and Helm Master

are trademarks of the

YAMAHA Motor Co., LTD. All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

Table of Contents

Introduction......................................1

Device Overview...................................... 1

GPSMAP 7x2 Plus and GPSMAP 9x2

Plus Connector View........................... 2

GPSMAP 12x2 Plus Connector

View...................................................... 3

GPSMAP 7x3 and GPSMAP 9x3

Connector View................................... 4

GPSMAP 12x3 Connector View.......... 5

Using the Touchscreen....................... 5

On-Screen Buttons.............................. 6

Locking and Unlocking the

Touchscreen........................................ 8

Tips and Shortcuts.................................. 8

Accessing Owner's Manuals on the

Chartplotter..............................................8

Accessing the Manuals from the

Web.......................................................... 8

Garmin Support Center........................... 8

Memory Cards......................................... 9

Inserting Memory Cards (GPSMAP

7x2 Plus/9x2 Plus/12x2 Plus)............ 9

Inserting Memory Cards (GPSMAP

7x3/9x3/12x3)................................... 10

Acquiring GPS Satellite Signals............10

Selecting the GPS Source................. 10

Customizing the Chartplotter..........11

Home Screen......................................... 11

Pinning a Feature Button.................. 12

Rearranging the Category Items...... 12

Menu Bar............................................... 12

Hiding and Showing the Menu Bar... 13

Setting the Vessel Type........................ 13

Adjusting the Backlight......................... 13

Adjusting the Color Mode..................... 13

Enabling Screen Lock........................... 14

Turning On the Chartplotter

Automatically........................................ 14

Automatically Turning Off the

System................................................... 14

Customizing Pages............................... 14

Customizing the Startup Screen...... 14

Creating a New Combination Page.. 15

Adding a SmartMode Layout............ 16

Customizing the Layout of a

SmartMode or Combination Page....16

Deleting a Combination Page........... 16

Customizing the Data Overlays........ 17

Resetting the Station Layouts.......... 17

Presets................................................... 17

Saving a New Preset......................... 17

Managing Presets............................. 18

Controlling the Chartplotter............ 18

Voice Control......................................... 18

Changing the Voice Control

Language........................................... 18

Supported Headsets......................... 18

Pairing a Wireless Headset with a

Garmin Chartplotter.......................... 18

Using a Wireless Headset with a

Garmin Chartplotter.......................... 18

Chartplotter Voice Commands......... 19

GRID Remote Control............................ 21

Pairing the GRID Device with the

Chartplotter from the Chartplotter... 21

Pairing the GRID Device with the

Chartplotter from the GRID Device... 21

Rotating the GRID Remote Input

Device.................................................21

ActiveCaptain App.......................... 21

ActiveCaptain Roles.............................. 22

Getting Started with the ActiveCaptain

App......................................................... 22

Enabling Smart Notifications............... 23

Receiving Notifications..................... 23

Managing Notifications.................... 24

Making Notifications Private............ 24

Updating Software with the

ActiveCaptain App................................ 24

Updating Charts with ActiveCaptain.... 25

Chart Subscriptions.............................. 25

Purchasing a Chart Subscription with

ActiveCaptain.................................... 25

Activating the Chart Subscription

Card.................................................... 25

Downloading Updated Charts...........26

Renewing Your Subscription............ 26

Communication with Wireless

Devices.......................................... 26

Table of Contents i

Wi‑Fi Network........................................ 26

Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network............26

Connecting a Wireless Device to the

Chartplotter........................................ 27

Changing the Wireless Channel....... 27

Changing the Wi‑Fi Host................... 27

Wireless Remote Control...................... 27

Pairing the Wireless Remote Control

With the Chartplotter......................... 27

Turning On and Off the Remote

Backlight............................................ 27

Disconnecting the Remote Control

from All Chartplotters....................... 27

Wireless Wind Sensor........................... 28

Connecting a Wireless Sensor to the

Chartplotter........................................ 28

Adjusting the Wind Sensor

Orientation......................................... 28

Viewing Boat Data on a Garmin

Watch..................................................... 28

Viewing Boat Data on a Garmin Nautix™

Device.................................................... 28

Charts and 3D Chart Views............. 29

Navigation Chart and Fishing Chart..... 29

Chart Symbols................................... 30

Zooming In and Out Using the

Touchscreen...................................... 30

Measuring a Distance on the

Chart................................................... 30

Creating a Waypoint on the Chart.... 30

Viewing Location and Object

Information on a Chart...................... 30

Viewing Details about Navaids.........31

Navigating to a Point on the Chart... 31

Premium Charts.................................... 32

Fish Eye 3D Chart View..................... 32

Viewing Tide Station Information.....33

Showing Satellite Imagery on the

Navigation Chart................................34

Viewing Aerial Photos of

Landmarks......................................... 34

Automatic Identification System......... 34

AIS Targeting Symbols..................... 35

Heading and Projected Course of

Activated AIS Targets....................... 36

Activating a Target for an AIS

Vessel.................................................36

Setting the Safe-Zone Collision

Alarm.................................................. 37

Viewing a List of AIS and MARPA

Threats............................................... 37

AIS Aids to Navigation...................... 38

AIS Distress Signals.......................... 39

Turning Off AIS Reception................ 39

Chart Menu............................................ 40

Chart Layers.......................................40

Chart Settings.................................... 44

Fish Eye 3D Settings......................... 44

Supported Maps.................................... 44

Garmin Quickdraw Contours

Mapping......................................... 45

Mapping a Body of Water Using the

Garmin Quickdraw Contours Feature.. 45

Adding a Label to a Garmin Quickdraw

Contours Map........................................ 45

Garmin Quickdraw Community............ 46

Connecting to the Garmin Quickdraw

Community with ActiveCaptain........ 46

Connecting to the Garmin Quickdraw

Community with Garmin Connect.... 46

Garmin Quickdraw Contours

Settings.................................................. 48

Navigation with a Chartplotter........ 48

Basic Navigation Questions................. 49

Route Color Coding............................... 49

Destinations.......................................... 50

Searching for a Destination by

Name.................................................. 50

Selecting a Destination Using the

Navigation Chart................................50

Searching for a Marine Services

Destination.........................................50

Setting and Following a Direct Course

Using Go To....................................... 50

Stopping Navigation..........................51

Waypoints.............................................. 51

Marking Your Present Location as a

Waypoint............................................ 51

Creating a Waypoint at a Different

Location............................................. 51

Marking a Man Overboard (MOB)

Location............................................. 51

Projecting a Waypoint....................... 51

ii Table of Contents

Viewing a List of all Waypoints........ 51

Editing a Saved Waypoint................. 52

Moving a Saved Waypoint................ 52

Browsing for and Navigating to a

Saved Waypoint................................. 53

Deleting a Waypoint or an MOB........53

Deleting All Waypoints...................... 53

Routes.................................................... 53

Creating and Navigating a Route From

Your Present Location...................... 54

Creating and Saving a Route............ 54

Viewing a List of Routes and Auto

Guidance Paths................................. 54

Editing a Saved Route....................... 54

Finding and Navigating a Saved

Route.................................................. 55

Browsing for and Navigating Parallel

to a Saved Route............................... 55

Initiating a Search Pattern................ 56

Deleting a Saved Route..................... 56

Deleting All Saved Routes................. 56

Auto Guidance....................................... 56

Setting and Following an Auto

Guidance Path................................... 56

Creating and Saving an Auto Guidance

Path.................................................... 57

Adjusting a Saved Auto Guidance

Path.................................................... 57

Canceling an Auto Guidance

Calculation in Progress..................... 57

Setting a Timed Arrival......................57

Auto Guidance Path

Configurations................................... 58

Tracks.................................................... 59

Showing Tracks................................. 59

Setting the Color of the Active

Track.................................................. 60

Saving the Active Track.................... 60

Viewing a List of Saved Tracks........ 60

Editing a Saved Track....................... 60

Saving a Track as a Route................ 60

Browsing for and Navigating a

Recorded Track................................. 60

Deleting a Saved Track..................... 60

Deleting All Saved Tracks................. 61

Retracing the Active Track................61

Clearing the Active Track.................. 61

Managing the Track Log Memory

During Recording............................... 61

Configuring the Recording Interval of

the Track Log..................................... 61

Boundaries.............................................61

Creating a Boundary..........................62

Converting a Route to a Boundary... 62

Converting a Track to a Boundary.... 62

Editing a Boundary............................ 62

Linking a Boundary to a SmartMode

Layout................................................ 62

Setting a Boundary Alarm................. 62

Disabling all Boundary Alarms......... 62

Deleting a Boundary.......................... 63

Deleting All Saved Waypoints, Tracks,

Routes, and Boundaries........................ 63

Sailing Features..............................63

Setting the Vessel Type for Sailing

Features................................................. 63

Sail Racing............................................. 63

Starting Line Guidance...................... 63

Starting the Race Timer.................... 64

Stopping the Race Timer.................. 64

Setting the Distance between the Bow

and the GPS Antenna........................ 64

Laylines Settings................................... 65

Polar Tables.......................................... 65

Importing a Polar Table Manually.... 65

Showing Polar Data in Data Fields... 66

Setting the Keel Offset.......................... 67

Sailboat Autopilot Operation................ 67

Wind Hold.......................................... 68

Tack and Gybe................................... 68

Heading Line and Angle Markers......... 69

Setting the Heading Line and Angle

Markers.............................................. 69

Sonar Fishfinder............................. 70

Stopping the Transmission of Sonar

Signals................................................... 70

Traditional Sonar View..........................70

Split-Frequency Sonar View.............. 70

Split-Zoom Sonar View..................... 71

Garmin ClearVü Sonar View................. 71

Garmin SideVü Sonar View...................72

SideVü Scanning Technology........... 73

Table of Contents iii

Measuring Distance on the Sonar

Screen................................................ 73

Panoptix Sonar Views........................... 73

LiveVü Down Sonar View.................. 74

LiveVü Forward Sonar View.............. 75

RealVü 3D Forward Sonar View........76

RealVü 3D Down Sonar View............ 77

RealVü 3D Historical Sonar View..... 78

FrontVü Sonar View.......................... 79

LiveScope Sonar View.......................... 79

Perspective View................................... 80

Selecting the Transducer Type............ 80

Selecting a Sonar Source..................... 80

Renaming a Sonar Source................ 81

Creating a Waypoint on the Sonar

Screen.................................................... 81

Pausing the Sonar Display....................81

Viewing Sonar History.......................... 81

Sonar Sharing........................................ 81

Zooming in a Panoptix LiveVü or

LiveScope Sonar View.......................... 82

Adjusting the Level of Detail.................82

Adjusting the Color Intensity................ 83

Sonar Setup........................................... 83

Setting the Zoom Level on the Sonar

Screen................................................ 84

Setting the Scroll Speed....................84

Adjusting the Range.......................... 84

Sonar Noise Rejection Settings........ 85

Sonar Appearance Settings.............. 85

Sonar Alarms..................................... 86

Advanced Sonar Settings................. 87

Transducer Installation Settings...... 87

Sonar Frequencies............................ 88

Turning On the A-Scope.................... 89

Panoptix Sonar Setup........................... 89

Adjusting the RealVü Viewing Angle

and Zoom Level................................. 89

Adjusting the RealVü Sweep

Speed................................................. 89

LiveVü Forward and FrontVü Sonar

Settings.............................................. 90

RealVü Appearance Settings............ 92

Panoptix Transducer Installation

Settings.............................................. 92

LiveScope and Perspective Sonar

Settings.................................................. 94

LiveScope and Perspective Sonar

Setup.................................................. 94

LiveScope and Perspective

Appearance Settings......................... 95

LiveScope and Perspective Layout

Settings.............................................. 95

LiveScope and Perspective

Transducer Installation Settings...... 95

Radar............................................. 96

Radar Interpretation.............................. 96

Radar Overlay.................................... 96

Radar Overlay and Chart Data

Alignment...........................................97

Transmitting Radar Signals.................. 97

Stopping the Transmission of Radar

Signals............................................... 97

Setting Up the Timed Transmit

Mode.................................................. 97

Enabling and Adjusting a Radar No

Transmit Zone................................... 97

Adjusting the Radar Range................... 98

Tips for Selecting a Radar Range..... 98

MotionScope™ Doppler

Radar Technology................................. 98

Enabling a Guard Zone......................... 98

Defining a Circular Guard Zone........ 99

Defining a Partial Guard Zone.......... 99

MARPA...................................................99

MARPA Targeting Symbols............ 100

Acquiring MARPA Targets

Automatically.................................. 100

Removing MARPA Targets

Automatically.................................. 100

Assigning a MARPA Tag to an

Object............................................... 100

Removing a MARPA Tag from a

Targeted Object............................... 100

Viewing Information about a MARPA-

tagged Object.................................. 100

Viewing a List of AIS and MARPA

Threats............................................. 101

Showing AIS Vessels on the Radar

Screen.............................................. 101

VRM and EBL................................... 101

Echo Trails........................................... 102

Turning on Echo Trails.................... 102

iv Table of Contents

Adjusting the Length of the Echo

Trails................................................ 102

Clearing the Echo Trails.................. 102

Radar Settings..................................... 102

Radar Gain....................................... 102

Radar Filter Settings........................104

Radar Options Menu....................... 105

Radar Setup Menu...........................105

Radar Appearance Settings............ 105

Radar Installation Settings............. 106

Radar My Vessel Layer Settings.....106

Selecting a Different Radar Source....106

Autopilot...................................... 107

Autopilot Configuration...................... 107

Selecting the Preferred Heading

Source.............................................. 107

Opening the Autopilot Screen............ 107

Autopilot Screen..................................108

Adjusting the Step Steering

Increment.........................................108

Setting the Power Saver................. 108

Enabling the Shadow Drive™

Feature............................................. 109

Autopilot Overlay Bar.......................... 109

Engaging the Autopilot....................... 109

Adjusting the Heading Using the

Helm................................................. 110

Adjusting the Heading with the

Chartplotter in Step Steering Mode 110

Steering Patterns................................ 110

Following the U-Turn Pattern..........110

Setting Up and Following the Circles

Pattern............................................. 110

Setting Up and Following the Zigzag

Pattern............................................. 110

Following the Williamson Turn

Pattern............................................. 111

Following an Orbit Pattern.............. 111

Setting Up and Following the

Cloverleaf Pattern........................... 111

Setting Up and Following a Search

Pattern............................................. 111

Cancelling a Steering Pattern......... 111

Adjusting the Autopilot Response..... 111

Enabling the Autopilot Controls on a

Garmin Watch......................................112

Customizing the Autopilot Button

Actions............................................. 112

Controlling the Autopilot with a GRID 20

Remote Control................................... 112

Reactor™ Autopilot Remote Control.. 112

Pairing a Reactor Autopilot Remote

Control With a Chartplotter.............112

Changing the Functions of the Reactor

Autopilot Remote Control Action

Keys..................................................112

Updating the Reactor Autopilot

Remote Control Software............... 113

Yamaha Autopilot............................... 113

Yamaha Autopilot Screen............... 114

Yamaha Autopilot Overlay Bar....... 115

Force® Trolling Motor Control...... 115

Connecting to a Trolling Motor.......... 115

Adding the Trolling Motor Controls to

Screens................................................ 116

Trolling Motor Control Bar.............. 116

Trolling Motor Settings....................... 117

Assigning a Shortcut to the Trolling

Motor Remote Control Shortcut

Keys..................................................117

Calibrating the Trolling Motor

Compass..........................................117

Setting the Bow Offset.................... 118

Digital Selective Calling................ 118

Networked Chartplotter and VHF Radio

Functionality........................................ 118

Turning On DSC................................... 118

DSC List............................................... 118

Viewing the DSC List....................... 119

Adding a DSC Contact.................... 119

Incoming Distress Calls......................119

Navigating to a Vessel in Distress. 119

Man-Overboard Distress Calls Initiated

from a VHF Radio............................ 119

Man-Overboard and SOS Distress

Calls Initiated from the

Chartplotter......................................119

Position Tracking................................ 119

Viewing a Position Report.............. 120

Navigating to a Tracked Vessel..... 120

Creating a Waypoint at the Position of

a Tracked Vessel............................. 120

Table of Contents v

Editing Information in a Position

Report...............................................120

Deleting a Position-Report Call...... 120

Viewing Vessel Trails on the Chart 120

Individual Routine Calls...................... 120

Selecting a DSC Channel................ 121

Making an Individual Routine Call.. 121

Making an Individual Routine Call to

an AIS Target................................... 121

Gauges and Graphs...................... 121

Viewing the Gauges............................ 122

Engine Alert Icons........................... 122

Changing the Data Shown in a

Gauge............................................... 122

Customizing the Gauges................ 123

Customizing Engine Gauge and Fuel

Gauge Limits................................... 123

Selecting the Number of Engines

Shown in Gauges............................ 123

Customizing the Engines Shown in

Gauges............................................. 123

Enabling Status Alarms for Engine

Gauges............................................. 123

Enabling Some Engine Gauge Status

Alarms.............................................. 124

Yamaha Engine Gauges..................... 124

Engine Condition Icons................... 125

Engine Alert Icons........................... 126

Setting Up the Gauges.................... 126

Mercury® Engine Gauges...................128

Setting the Fuel Alarm........................ 129

Synchronizing the Fuel Data with the

Actual Vessel Fuel...........................129

Viewing the Wind Gauges...................129

Configuring the Sailing Wind

Gauge............................................... 129

Configuring the Speed Source........129

Configuring the Heading Source of the

Wind Gauge..................................... 130

Customizing the Close-Hauled Wind

Gauge............................................... 130

Viewing Trip Gauges........................... 130

Resetting Trip Gauges.................... 130

Viewing Graphs................................... 130

Setting the Graph Range and Time

Scales.............................................. 130

Battery Management.......................... 131

Setting Up the Battery Management

Page................................................. 131

inReach® Messages.....................131

Connecting an inReach Device to the

Chartplotter......................................... 131

Receiving inReach Messages............ 131

Sending an inReach Preset Message 131

Replying to an inReach Message....... 132

Digital Switching...........................132

Adding and Editing a Digital Switching

Page..................................................... 132

Garmin Boat Switch™.......................... 132

Configuring the Garmin Boat Switch

Device.............................................. 132

Using the Bilge Pump Switches..... 134

Using Dimmable Lights...................134

Controlling Third-Party Equipment

Installed on Your Boat.................. 134

Power-Pole® Anchor System.............134

Enabling the Power-Pole Anchor

Overlay............................................. 134

Setting Up the Power-Pole Anchor. 135

Power-Pole Overlay......................... 135

Enabling the Mercury Helm................ 136

Mercury Troll Control Features.......... 136

Adding the Mercury Troll Control

Overlay............................................. 136

Mercury Troll Overlay...................... 137

Mercury Cruise Control....................... 137

Enabling the Mercury Cruise Control

Overlay............................................. 137

Mercury Cruise Control Overlay..... 138

Dometic® Optimus® Features.......... 138

Activating the Optimus Overlay

Bar.................................................... 138

Optimus Overlay Bar Overview....... 139

Optimus Overlay Symbols.............. 139

Optimus Limp Home Mode............ 139

Tide, Current, and Celestial

Information.................................. 140

Tide Station Information.....................140

Current Station Information............... 140

Celestial Information.......................... 140

vi Table of Contents

Viewing Tide Station, Current Station, or

Celestial Information for a Different

Date...................................................... 140

Viewing Information for a Different Tide

or Current Station................................ 140

Viewing Almanac Information from the

Navigation Chart................................. 141

Warning Manager......................... 141

Viewing Messages.............................. 141

Sorting and Filtering Messages......... 141

Saving Messages to a Memory Card. 141

Clearing All of the Messages............. 141

Media Player................................ 141

Opening the Media Player.................. 142

Media Player Icons..........................142

Selecting the Media Device and

Source.................................................. 142

Adjusting the Volume and Audio

Levels................................................... 142

Adjusting the Volume......................142

Adjusting the Audio Level............... 143

Muting the Media Volume.............. 143

Stereo Zones and Groups...................143

Selecting the Home Zone............... 143

Adjusting the Zone Volume............ 144

Disabling a Speaker Zone............... 144

Creating a Group............................. 144

Playing Music...................................... 144

Browsing for Music......................... 144

Setting a Song to Repeat................ 145

Setting All Songs to Repeat............ 145

Setting Songs to Shuffle................. 145

Radio.................................................... 145

Setting the Tuner Region................ 145

Changing the Radio Station............ 145

Changing the Tuning Mode............ 146

Presets............................................. 146

DAB Playback...................................... 146

Setting the DAB Tuner Region........ 146

Scanning for DAB Stations............. 146

Changing DAB Stations...................147

DAB Presets.....................................147

SiriusXM Satellite Radio..................... 147

Locating a SiriusXM Radio ID......... 147

Activating a SiriusXM Subscription 148

Customizing the Channel Guide..... 148

Saving a SiriusXM Channel to the

Presets List...................................... 148

Parental Controls............................ 148

Setting the Device Name.................... 149

Updating the Media Player Software. 149

SiriusXM Weather.........................149

SiriusXM Equipment and Subscription

Requirements...................................... 149

Weather Data Broadcasts.................. 150

Weather Warnings and Weather

Bulletins............................................... 150

Viewing Precipitation Information..... 150

Storm Cell and Lightning

Information...................................... 150

Hurricane Information.....................150

Forecast Information.......................... 150

Viewing a Marine Forecast or an

Offshore Forecast........................... 151

Viewing Forecast Information for

Another Time Period....................... 151

Weather Fronts and Pressure

Centers.............................................151

City Forecasts..................................152

Viewing Fish Mapping Data................152

Viewing Sea Conditions...................... 152

Surface Winds................................. 153

Wave Height, Wave Period, and Wave

Direction...........................................153

Viewing Forecast Sea Conditions

Information for Another Time

Period............................................... 153

Viewing Sea Temperature

Information.......................................... 153

Surface Pressure and Water

Temperature Data........................... 154

Changing the Sea Surface

Temperature Color Range.............. 154

Visibility Information........................... 154

Viewing Forecast Visibility Information

for Another Time Period................. 154

Viewing Buoy Reports......................... 154

Viewing Local Weather Information

near a Buoy...................................... 154

Weather Overlay.................................. 155

Viewing Weather Subscription

Information.......................................... 155

Table of Contents vii

Viewing Video.............................. 155

Selecting a Video Source....................155

Alternating Among Multiple Video

Sources............................................ 155

Networked Video Devices.................. 155

Using Video Presets on Networked

Video Cameras................................ 156

Camera Settings..............................156

Video Settings................................. 157

Associating the Camera to a Video

Source.............................................. 157

Video Camera Movement Control..157

Configuring the Video Appearance.... 158

Garmin VIRB® Action Cameras......... 158

Connecting a VIRB 360 Action

Camera............................................ 158

Connecting a VIRB Action Camera 159

Controlling the VIRB Action Camera

with the Chartplotter....................... 159

Adding the VIRB Action Camera

Controls to Other Screens.............. 161

HDMI Out Video Considerations........ 161

Pairing the GC™ 100 Camera with a

Garmin Chartplotter............................ 162

Surround View Camera System.....162

Changing a Camera............................ 163

Viewing a Camera Feed Full Screen.. 163

Changing the Surround View Camera

Layout.................................................. 163

Showing and Hiding the Visual

Bumper................................................ 163

Adjusting the Visual Bumper.......... 163

Showing the Distance Marker............ 163

Renaming a Camera........................... 163

Setting the Camera to Mirrored Stern

View..................................................... 163

Device Configuration.................... 164

System Settings.................................. 164

Sounds and Display Settings.......... 164

GPS Settings....................................165

Station Settings............................... 165

Viewing System Software

Information...................................... 165

Viewing E-label Regulatory and

Compliance Information................. 165

Preferences Settings.......................... 166

Units Settings.................................. 166

Navigation Settings......................... 166

Communications Settings.................. 169

NMEA 0183 Settings....................... 169

NMEA 2000 Settings....................... 169

Garmin Marine Network..................170

Setting Alarms.....................................170

Navigation Alarms...........................170

System Alarms................................ 171

Sonar Alarms................................... 171

Setting Weather Alarms.................. 171

Setting the Fuel Alarm.................... 171

My Vessel Settings............................. 172

Setting the Keel Offset.................... 173

Setting the Water Temperature

Offset............................................... 174

Fuel Settings.................................... 174

Calibrating a Water-Speed Device.. 174

Other Vessels Settings....................... 175

Settings that are Synced on the Garmin

Marine Network...................................175

Restoring the Original Chartplotter

Factory Settings.................................. 176

Sharing and Managing User Data.. 176

Selecting a File Type for Third-Party

Waypoints and Routes........................ 176

Copying User Data from a Memory

Card......................................................177

Copying User Data to a Memory

Card......................................................177

Updating Built-In Maps with a Memory

Card and Garmin Express................... 177

Backing Up Data to a Computer.........178

Restoring Backup Data to a

Chartplotter......................................... 178

Saving System Information to a Memory

Card......................................................178

Appendix...................................... 179

ActiveCaptain and Garmin Express... 179

Garmin Express App........................... 179

Installing the Garmin Express App on a

Computer......................................... 179

Registering Your Device Using the

Garmin Express App....................... 180

viii Table of Contents

Updating Your Charts Using the

Garmin Express App....................... 181

Software Updates............................181

Cleaning the Screen............................ 182

Viewing Images on a Memory card... 183

Screenshots........................................ 183

Capturing Screenshots................... 183

Copying Screenshots to a

Computer......................................... 183

Troubleshooting.................................. 183

My device will not acquire GPS

signals..............................................183

My device will not turn on or keeps

turning off........................................ 184

My device is not creating waypoints in

the correct location......................... 184

Specifications......................................185

GPSMAP 7x2 Plus Specifications.. 185

GPSMAP 9x2 Plus Specifications.. 186

GPSMAP 12x2 Plus Specifications 187

GPSMAP 7x3 Specifications.......... 188

GPSMAP 9x3 Specifications.......... 189

GPSMAP 12x3 Specifications........ 190

Sonar Models Specifications......... 191

NMEA 2000 PGN Information........ 192

NMEA 0183 Information................. 195

J1939 Information.......................... 197

Table of Contents ix

Introduction

WARNING

See the Important Safety and Product Information guide in the product box for product warnings and other

important information.

All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance

or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and

conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,

personal injury, or death.

NOTE: Not all features are available on all models.

The Garmin

website at support.garmin.com presents up-to-date information about your product. The support

pages will provide answers to frequently asked support questions, and you can download software and chart

updates. There is also contact information to Garmin support should you have any questions.

Device Overview

Touchscreen

Power key

Automatic backlight sensor

12x2/A12 models: 2 SD

memory card slots. 7x2/9x2 models: 2 microSD

memory card slots.

7x3/9x3/12x3 models: 2 microSD memory card slots are on the back of the device. All models: 32GB

max. card size.

Introduction 1

GPSMAP 7x2 Plus and GPSMAP 9x2 Plus Connector View

The connectors and locations vary based upon the model. This image and table represent a GPSMAP 922xs

Plus model.

J1939 J1939 engine network (Not available on all models)

NMEA 2000 NMEA 2000

network

CVBS IN Composite video in

ETHERNET Garmin Marine Network

8-PIN XDCR 8-pin transducer (Not available on all models)

POWER Power and NMEA

0183 network

Ground screw

2 Introduction

GPSMAP 12x2 Plus Connector View

The connectors and locations vary based upon the model.

SONAR 12-pin transducer (Not available on all models)

POWER Power and NMEA 0183 network

Ground screw

CVBS IN Composite video in

J1939 Engine or J1939 network

ETHERNET Garmin Marine Network

HDMI OUT HDMI

video out

NMEA 2000 NMEA 2000 network

Introduction 3

GPSMAP 7x3 and GPSMAP 9x3 Connector View

POWER Power and NMEA 0183 network

ETHERNET Garmin Marine Network

J1939 J1939 engine network

Ground screw

CVBS IN Composite video in

SONAR 12-pin transducer (Not available on all models)

USB Micro-USB for compatible Garmin card reader

NMEA 2000 NMEA 2000 network

2 microSD memory card slots, 32GB max.

Only compatible Garmin card readers recommended. Third-party card readers are not guaranteed to be fully compatible.

4 Introduction

GPSMAP 12x3 Connector View

POWER Power and NMEA 0183 network

SONAR 12-pin transducer (Not available on all models)

HDMI OUT HDMI video out

CVBS IN Composite video in

USB Micro-USB for compatible Garmin card reader

Ground screw

ETHERNET Garmin Marine Network

NMEA 2000 NMEA 2000 network

J1939 Engine or J1939 network

2 microSD memory card slots, 32GB max.

Using the Touchscreen

• Tap the screen to select an item.

• Drag or swipe your finger across the screen to pan or scroll.

• Pinch two fingers together to zoom out.

• Spread two fingers apart to zoom in.

Only compatible Garmin card readers recommended. Third-party card readers are not guaranteed to be fully compatible.

Introduction 5

On-Screen Buttons

These on-screen buttons may be displayed on some screens and functions. Some buttons are accessible only

in a combination page or SmartMode

™

layout or when accessories, such as a radar, are connected.

6 Introduction

Button Function

Clears the on-screen icons and re-centers the screen on the boat

Opens a full-screen view of the item

Creates a new waypoint

Creates a route, with turns, to the destination

Adds a turn to the route at the selected location

Removes the last added turn from the route

Creates a direct route, without turns, to the destination

Creates an Auto Guidance route to the destination

Begins navigation

Ends navigation

Stops and starts radar transmission

Opens the radar gain adjustment menu

Opens the radar sea clutter adjustment menu

Opens the radar rain clutter adjustment menu

Turns on and off the radar echo trails

Acquires a radar target and begins tracking it

Shows and sets the VRM/EBL line

Opens the menu for the page or function

Opens the Weather menu for the page or function

Opens the Radar menu for the page or function

Opens the Presets menu for the page or function

Introduction 7

Locking and Unlocking the Touchscreen

You can lock the touchscreen to prevent inadvertent screen touches.

1 Select > Lock Touchscreen to lock the screen.

2 Select to unlock the screen.

Tips and Shortcuts

• Press to turn on the chartplotter.

• From any screen, press repeatedly to scroll through the brightness levels, if available. This can be helpful

when the brightness is so low you cannot see the screen.

• Select from any screen to open to the home screen.

• Select Options to open additional settings about that screen.

• Select Toolbars to quickly add an overlay to the current page.

• Select to close the menu when finished.

• Press to open additional options, such as adjusting the backlight.

• Press , and select Power > Turn Off System, or hold until the Turn Off System bar fills to turn off the

chartplotter, when available.

• Press , and select Power > Sleep Station to set the chartplotter to standby mode, when available.

To exit standby mode, select .

• Depending on the features of your chartplotter, not all feature buttons are visible are on the home screen.

Swipe right or left to view the additional feature buttons.

• On some menu buttons, select the button to enable the option.

A green light on an option indicates the option is enabled .

• When available, select to open the menu.

Accessing Owner's Manuals on the Chartplotter

1 Select Info > Owner's Manual.

2 Select a manual.

3 Select Open.

Accessing the Manuals from the Web

You can get the latest owner's manual and translations of manuals from the Garmin website. The owner's

manual includes instructions for using device features and accessing regulatory information.

1 Go to garmin.com/manuals/GPSMAP7x3-9x3-12x3.

2 Select the Owner's Manual.

A web manual opens. You can download the entire manual by selecting Download PDF.

Garmin Support Center

Go to support.garmin.com for help and information, such as product manuals, frequently asked questions,

videos, software updates, and customer support.

8 Introduction

Memory Cards

You can use optional memory cards with the chartplotter. Map cards allow you to view high-resolution satellite

imagery and aerial reference photos of ports, harbors, marinas, and other points of interest. You can use blank

memory cards to record Garmin Quickdraw

™

Contours mapping, record sonar (with a compatible transducer),

transfer data such as waypoints and routes to another compatible chartplotter or a computer, and use the

ActiveCaptain

app.

This device supports up to a 32 GB memory card, formatted to FAT32 with speed class 4 or higher. Use of

an 8 GB or larger memory card with speed class 10 is recommended. An 8GB memory card is included with

GPSMAP 7x3/9x3/12x3 models.

Model Memory Card Location Memory Card Type

GPSMAP 7x2 Plus Front of the device microSD

GPSMAP 9x2 Plus Front of the device microSD

GPSMAP 12x2 Plus Front of the device SD

GPSMAP 7x3 Back of the device microSD

GPSMAP 9x3 Back of the device microSD

GPSMAP 12x3 Back of the device microSD

Inserting Memory Cards (GPSMAP 7x2 Plus/9x2 Plus/12x2 Plus)

You can use optional memory cards with the chartplotter. Map cards allow you to view high-resolution satellite

imagery and aerial reference photos of ports, harbors, marinas, and other points of interest. You can use blank

memory cards to record Garmin Quickdraw Contours mapping, record sonar (with a compatible transducer),

transfer data such as waypoints and routes to another compatible chartplotter or a computer, and use the

ActiveCaptain app.

This device supports up to a 32 GB memory card, formatted to FAT32 with speed class 4 or higher. Use of an

8 GB or larger memory card with speed class 10 is recommended. 12x2/A12 models use an SD memory card.

7x2/9x2 models use a microSD memory card. A memory card is not included with GPSMAP 7x2/9x2/12x2/A12

models.

1 Open the access flap or door on the front of the chartplotter.

2 Insert the memory card .

3 Press the card in until it clicks.

Introduction 9

4 Clean and dry the gasket and door.

NOTICE

To prevent corrosion, be sure the memory card, gasket, and door are thoroughly dry before closing the door.

5 Close the door.

Inserting Memory Cards (GPSMAP 7x3/9x3/12x3)

This device supports up to a 32 GB microSD memory card, formatted to FAT32 with speed class 4 or higher.

Use of an 8 GB or larger memory card with speed class 10 is recommended. An 8GB memory card is included

with GPSMAP 7x3/9x3/12x3 models.

1 Open the weather cap on the back of the chartplotter.

2 Insert the memory card .

3 Press the card in until it clicks.

4 Press the weather cap firmly shut to prevent corrosion.

Acquiring GPS Satellite Signals

The device may need a clear view of the sky to acquire satellite signals. The time and date are set automatically

based on the GPS position.

1 Turn on the device.

2 Wait while the device locates satellites.

It may take 30 to 60 seconds to acquire satellite signals.

To view the GPS satellite signal strength, select Settings > System > GPS.

If the device loses satellite signals, a flashing question mark appears over on the chart.

For more information about GPS, go to garmin.com/aboutGPS. For help acquiring satellite signals, see My

device will not acquire GPS signals, page183.

Selecting the GPS Source

You can select your preferred source for GPS data, if you have more than one GPS source.

1 Select Settings > System > GPS > Source.

2 Select the source for GPS data.

10 Introduction

Customizing the Chartplotter

Home Screen

The home screen is an overlay that provides access to all of the features in the chartplotter. The features are

dependent on the accessories you have connected to the chartplotter. You may not have all of the options and

features discussed in this manual.

When viewing any screen, you can return to the home screen by selecting .

Settings menu button

Features buttons

Present time, present depth, or autopilot control button

Category tabs

Closes the home screen and returns to the previously open page

The categories tabs provide quick access to the main features of your chartplotter. For example, the Sonar tab

displays the views and screens related to the sonar feature. You can save items you commonly access to the

Pinned category.

TIP: To view the available categories tabs, you may need to click and drag a tab to scroll left or right.

The SmartMode items are geared toward an activity, such as cruising or docking. When a SmartMode button

is selected from the home screen, each display in the station can show unique information. For example, when

Cruising is selected from the home screen, one display can show the navigation chart and another display can

show the radar screen.

When multiple displays are installed on the Garmin Marine Network, you can group them together into a station.

A station enables the displays to work together, instead of as several separate displays. You can customize

the layout of the screens on each display, making each screen different on each display. When you change the

layout of a screen in one display, the changes appear on only that display. When you change the name and

symbol of the layout, those changes appear on all displays in the station, to maintain a consistent appearance.

Customizing the Chartplotter 11

Pinning a Feature Button

You can add features, such as a chart, combo screen, or gauge to the Pinned category.

NOTE: If your chartplotter has been customized by the boat manufacturer, the Pinned category contains

customized items for your boat. You cannot edit the Pinned category.

1 Select a category, such as Charts.

2 Hold a feature button, such as Nav. Chart.

3 Select Add to Pinned > OK.

The feature is added to the Pinned category.

To see the Pinned items, select a Pinned item, and swipe to the left or right.

To remove a feature from the Pinned category, press and hold the feature to remove, select Remove Pin > Yes.

Rearranging the Category Items

You can customize the screen by rearranging the items in the categories.

1 Select a category to customize, such as Charts

2 Hold the button you want to move, such as Nav. Chart, until the menu appears.

3 Select Rearrange.

Arrows appear on the feature buttons.

4 Repeat until you finish customizing the screen.

5 Select Back or Close when finished.

Menu Bar

The menu bar along the bottom of the screen provides access to many functions of the chartplotter, the options

menu, and the home screen.

12 Customizing the Chartplotter

Engages and disengages the autopilot

Creates a waypoint at your location

Opens the Information menu

Shows certain active function such as, radar

Opens the home screen

TIP: Use the arrows to scroll through the Pinned features.

Opens the Warning Manager

TIP: The icon changes color to indicate severity.

Creates an SOS

Allows you to add an overlay to the current page

Opens the options menu

Hiding and Showing the Menu Bar

You can hide the menu bar automatically to make more screen space available.

1 Select Settings > Preferences > Menu Bar Display > Auto.

After a short period of time on a main page, such as a chart, the menu bar collapses down.

2 Swipe the screen from the bottom up to show the menu bar again.

Setting the Vessel Type

You can select your boat type to configure the chartplotter settings and to use features customized for your

boat type.

1 Select Settings > My Vessel > Vessel Type.

2 Select an option.

Adjusting the Backlight

1 Select Settings > System > Sounds and Display > Backlight.

2 Adjust the backlight.

TIP: From any screen, press repeatedly to scroll through the brightness levels. This can be helpful when

the brightness is so low you cannot see the screen.

Adjusting the Color Mode

1 Select Settings > System > Sounds and Display > Color Mode.

TIP: Select > Color Mode from any screen to access the color settings.

2 Select an option.

Customizing the Chartplotter 13

Enabling Screen Lock

For anti-theft protection and to prevent unauthorized use of your device, you can enable the Screen Lock feature

which requires a PIN (Personal Identification Number). When enabled, you must enter the PIN to unlock the

screen each time you turn on the device. You can set up recovery questions and answers as prompts in case

you forget the PIN.

NOTICE

If you enable the Screen Lock feature, Garmin Support cannot retrieve the PIN or access your device. It is your

responsibility to provide the PIN to anyone authorized to use the vessel.

1 Select Settings > System > Sounds and Display > Screen Lock > Setup.

2 Enter a memorable numeric PIN of 6 digits.

3 Reenter the PIN to verify.

4 When prompted, choose and answer three PIN recovery questions.

You can Disable or Reset the PIN and recovery questions as needed.

Turning On the Chartplotter Automatically

You can set the chartplotter to turn on automatically when the power is applied. Otherwise, you must turn on the

chartplotter by pressing .

Select Settings > System > Auto Power Up.

NOTE: When Auto Power Up is On, and the chartplotter is turned off using , and power is removed and

reapplied within less than two minutes, you may need to press to restart the chartplotter.

Automatically Turning Off the System

You can set the chartplotter and the whole system to turn off automatically after it has been asleep for the

selected length of time. Otherwise, you must press and hold to turn off the system manually.

1 Select Settings > System > Auto Power Off.

2 Select an option.

Customizing Pages

Customizing the Startup Screen

You can personalize the image that is displayed when the chartplotter is turning on. For the best fit, the

image should be 50MB or less and conform to the recommended dimensions (Recommended Startup Image

Dimensions, page15).

1 Insert a memory card that contains the image you want to use.

2 Select Settings > System > Sounds and Display > Startup Image > Select Image.

3 Select the memory card slot.

4 Select the image.

5 Select Set as Startup Image.

The new image is shown when turning on the chartplotter.

14 Customizing the Chartplotter

Recommended Startup Image Dimensions

For the best fit for the startup images, use an image that has the following dimensions, in pixels.

Display resolution Image width Image height

WVGA 680 200

WSVGA 880 270

WXGA 1080 350

HD 1240 450

WUXGA 1700 650

Creating a New Combination Page

You can create a custom combination page to suit your needs.

1 Select Combo > Add Combo.

2 Select a window.

3 Select a function for the window.

4 Repeat these steps for each window of the page.

5 Hold a window to rearrange it.

6 Hold a data field to select new data.

7 Select Layout, and select a layout.

8 Select Name, enter a name for the page, and select Done.

9 Select Overlays, and select which data to show.

10 Select Done when you have finished customizing the page.

Customizing the Chartplotter 15

Adding a SmartMode Layout

You can add SmartMode layouts to suit your needs. Each customization made to one SmartMode layout in a

station appears on all displays in the station.

1 Select SmartMode™ > Add Layout.

2 Select an option:

• To change the name, select Name & Symbol > Name, enter a new name, and select Done.

• To change the SmartMode symbol, select Name & Symbol > Symbol, and select a new symbol.

• To change the number of functions shown and the layout of the screen, select Layout, and select an

option.

• To change the function of a portion of the screen, select the window to change, and select a function.

• To change how the screens are split, drag the arrows to a new location.

• To change the data shown on the page and additional data bars, select Overlays, and select an option.

• To assign a preset to a portion of the SmartMode screen, select Presets > Include, and select a preset.

Customizing the Layout of a SmartMode or Combination Page

You can customize the layout and data shown in the combination pages and SmartMode layouts. When you

change the layout of a page in a display you are interacting with, the change appears only on that display, except

for the SmartMode name and symbol. When you change the SmartMode name or symbol for the layout, the new

name or symbol appears on all displays in the station.

1 Open a page to customize.

2 Select Options.

3 Select Edit Layout or Edit Combo.

4 Select an option:

• To change the name, select Name or Name & Symbol > Name, enter a new name, and select Done.

• To change the SmartMode symbol, select Name & Symbol > Symbol, and select a new symbol.

• To change the number of functions shown and the layout of the screen, select Layout, and select an

option.

• To change the function of a portion of the screen, select the window to change, and select a function from

the list on the right.

• To change how the screens are split, drag the arrows to a new location.

• To change the data shown on the page and additional data bars, select Overlays, and select an option.

TIP: While viewing a screen with data overlay, hold an overlay box to quickly change the data in it.

• To assign a preset to a portion of the SmartMode screen, select Presets > Include, and select a preset

from the list on the right.

Deleting a Combination Page

1 Select Combo.

2 Press and hold a combination page to delete.

3 Select Delete Combo > Yes.

16 Customizing the Chartplotter

Customizing the Data Overlays

You can customize the data in the data overlays shown on a screen.

1 Select an option based on the type of screen you are viewing:

• From a full screen view, select Options > Edit Overlays.

• From a combination screen, select Options > Edit Combo > Overlays.

• From a SmartMode screen, select Options > Edit Layout > Overlays.

TIP: To quickly change the data shown in an overlay box, hold the overlay box.

2 Select an item to customize the data and data bar:

• To show the data overlays, select Data, select the location, and select Back.

• To change the data shown in an overlay box, select the overlay box, select the new data to show, and

select Back.

• To customize the information shown when navigating, select Navigation, and select an option.

• To turn on other data bars, select Top Bar or Bottom Bar, and select the necessary options.

3 Select Done.

Resetting the Station Layouts

You can restore the layouts in this station to the factory default settings.

Select Settings > System > Station Information > Reset Layouts.

Presets

A preset is a collection of settings that optimize the screen or view. You can use particular presets to optimize

groups of settings for your activity. For example, some settings might be optimal for when you are fishing, and

others might be optimal for when you are cruising. Presets are available on some screens, such as charts, sonar

views, and radar views.

To select a preset for a compatible screen, select Options > , and select the preset.

When you are using a preset and you make changes to the settings or view, you can save the changes to the

preset or create a new preset based on the new customizations.

Saving a New Preset

After you have customized the settings and view of a screen, you can save the customization as a new preset.

1 From a compatible screen, change the settings and view.

2 Select Options > > Save > New.

3 Enter a name, and select Done.

4 Select an item, and select Include to include or exclude the item from the preset.

Customizing the Chartplotter 17

Managing Presets

You can customize the pre-loaded presets and edit presets you created.

1 From a compatible screen, select Options > > Manage.

2 Select a preset.

3 Select an option:

• To rename the preset, select Rename, enter a name, and select Done.

• To edit the preset, select Edit, and update the preset.

• To delete the preset, select Delete.

• To reset all presets to factory settings, select Reset All.

Controlling the Chartplotter

You can control the chartplotter using the touchscreen, using GRID

™

remote controls, and using a Garmin voice

control device.

Voice Control

After installing the Garmin Voice Control USB module (010-13194-00), you can use your voice to control the

chartplotter using a compatible headset.

Changing the Voice Control Language

1 From the home screen, select Settings > System > Sounds and Display > Voice Control.

2 Select Voice Control > Voice Language.

3 Select the voice control language.

NOTE: The voice control language can be different than the text language.

Supported Headsets

The Voice Control USB module supports headsets and speakers with the following specifications:

• Bluetooth

hands-free profile version 1.6 or higher

• mSBC audio codec (16 kHZ)

NOTE: Headset manufacturers often list these as "HD Voice" or "Wideband Speech" headsets.

A list of supported headsets is available at support.garmin.com/marine.

Pairing a Wireless Headset with a Garmin Chartplotter

1 On the chartplotter, select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices > Headsets.

2 Select Search for Devices.

3 Enable pairing mode on your headset according to the manufacturer's instructions.

The name of your headset appears on the chartplotter after it is detected.

4 Select the name of your headset.

5 Select Connect.

NOTE: Only one headset can be paired at a time.

Your headset appears on the chartplotter as Paired and Connected.

Using a Wireless Headset with a Garmin Chartplotter

Before using a wireless headset for voice control, make sure the volume on your headset is sufficient to hear

voice responses.

1 Say OK Garmin.

2 Say a command (Chartplotter Voice Commands, page19).

The chartplotter completes the action or provides a voice response.

18 Controlling the Chartplotter

Chartplotter Voice Commands

The voice command system is designed to detect natural speech. This is a list of commonly used voice

commands, but the device does not require these exact phrases (other than OK Garmin). You can try saying

variations of these commands in a way that is natural to you. An expanded list of voice commands is available

at garmin.com/support/marine_voice_commands.

Controlling the Chartplotter 19

Voice Command Function

OK Garmin Prepares chartplotter for voice commands

Show Navigation Chart Opens the navigation chart screen

Show Fishing Chart Opens the fishing chart screen

Show Radar Opens the radar screen

Show Sonar Opens the sonar screen

What's the Depth Replies with depth at current location

What's the Fuel Level Replies with current fuel level

What's the Engine Temperature Replies with current engine temperature

What's the System Unit Voltage Replies with current system unit voltage

What's the Distance to the Next Waypoint Replies with distance to next set waypoint

Tell me the Tide Info Replies with current tide information

Show Media Player Opens the media player

Play Music Plays the currently selected media

Pause Music Pauses the currently selected media

Resume Resumes the currently selected media

Previous Track Returns to the previous track

Next Track Skips to the next track

Mute Mutes media

Unmute Unmutes media

Lower Volume Lowers media volume

Raise Volume Raises media volume

Show Traditional Sonar Opens the traditional sonar screen

Show Clear View Opens the Garmin ClearVü

™

sonar screen

Show Side View Opens the Garmin SideVü

™

sonar screen

Show Live Scope Opens the LiveScope

™

screen

Lock Screen Locks the chartplotter

Unlock Screen Unlocks the chartplotter

Home Screen Opens the home screen

Automatic Brightness Enables automatic display brightness adjustment

Raise Brightness Raises display brightness

Lower Brightness Lowers display brightness

Sleep Display Puts display to sleep

20 Controlling the Chartplotter

Voice Command Function

Wake Display Wakes display

Beeper Off Disables chartplotter beeper

Beeper On Enables chartplotter beeper

Screenshot Captures a screenshot

GRID Remote Control

Pairing the GRID Device with the Chartplotter from the Chartplotter

NOTE: These steps are applicable to both the GRID device and the GRID 20 device.

Before you can pair the GRID 20 device with the chartplotter to make the data connection, you must supply

power using batteries, the included power cable, or a NMEA 2000 network connection.

Before you can pair the GRID device with the chartplotter, you must connect it to the Garmin Marine Network.

1 Select Settings > System > Station Information > GRID™ Pairing > Add.

2 Select an action:

• On the GRID remote input device, press SELECT.

• On the GRID 20 remote input device, press and until the remote control beeps three times.

Pairing the GRID Device with the Chartplotter from the GRID Device

NOTE: This is not applicable to the GRID 20 device.

1 On the GRID remote input device, press + and HOME at the same time.

A selection page opens on all of the chartplotters on the Garmin Marine Network.

2 Rotate the wheel on the GRID remote input device to highlight Select on the chartplotter you want to control

with the GRID remote input device.

3 Press SELECT.

Rotating the GRID Remote Input Device

For certain installation situations, you can rotate the orientation of the GRID device.

NOTE: This is not applicable to the GRID 20 device.

1 Select Settings > Communications > Marine Network.

2 Select the GRID device.

ActiveCaptain App

WARNING

This feature allows users to submit information. Garmin makes no representations about the accuracy,

completeness, or timeliness of information submitted by users. Any use or reliance on the information

submitted by users is at your own risk.

The ActiveCaptain app provides a connection to your GPSMAP device, charts, maps, and the community for a

connected boating experience.

On your mobile device with the ActiveCaptain app, you can download, purchase, and update maps and charts.

You can use the app to easily and quickly transfer user data, such as waypoints and routes, connect to the

Garmin Quickdraw Contours Community, update device software, and plan your trip. You can also control the

GPSMAP device from the app using the Garmin Helm

™

feature.

You can connect to the ActiveCaptain community for up-to-date feedback on marinas and other points of

interest. The app can push smart notifications, such as calls and texts, to your chartplotter display when paired.

ActiveCaptain App 21

ActiveCaptain Roles

Your level of interaction with the GPSMAP device using the ActiveCaptain app depends on your role.

Feature Owner Guest

Update software Yes Yes

Automatically transfer Garmin Quickdraw contours you have downloaded or created Yes No

Push smart notifications Yes Yes

Automatically transfer user data, such as waypoints and routes Yes No

Begin navigating to a specific waypoint or navigating a specific route, and send that waypoint

or route to the GPSMAP device

Yes Yes

Getting Started with the ActiveCaptain App

You can connect a mobile device to the GPSMAP device using the ActiveCaptain app. The app provides a

quick and easy way for you to interact with your GPSMAP device and complete such tasks as sharing data,

registering, updating the device software, and receiving mobile device notifications.

1 From the GPSMAP device, select Vessel > ActiveCaptain.

2 From the ActiveCaptain page, select Wi-Fi Network > Wi-Fi > On.

3 Enter a name and password for this network.

4 Insert a memory card in the GPSMAP device's card slot (Memory Cards, page9).

5 Select Set ActiveCaptain Card.

NOTICE

You might be prompted to format the memory card. Formatting the card deletes all information saved on the

card. This includes any saved user data, such as waypoints. Formatting the card is recommended, but not

required. Before formatting the card, you should save the data from the memory card onto the device internal

memory (Copying User Data from a Memory Card, page177). After formatting the card for the ActiveCaptain

app, you can transfer the user data back to the card (Copying User Data to a Memory Card, page177).

Be sure the card is inserted each time you want to use the ActiveCaptain feature.

6 From the application store on your mobile device, install and open the ActiveCaptain app.

7 Bring the mobile device within 32m (105ft.) of the GPSMAP device.

8 From your mobile device settings, open the Wi‑Fi

connections page and connect to the Garmin device, using

the name and password you entered in the Garmin device.

22 ActiveCaptain App

Enabling Smart Notifications

WARNING

Do not read or reply to notifications while operating the vessel. Failure to pay attention to the conditions on the

water can result in vessel damage, personal injury, or death.

Before your GPSMAP device can receive notifications, you must connect it to your mobile device and to the

ActiveCaptain app.

1 From the GPSMAP device, select ActiveCaptain > Smart Notifications > Enable Notifications.

2 Turn on Bluetooth technology in the mobile device settings.

3 Bring the devices within 10m (33ft.) of each other.

4 From the ActiveCaptain app on the mobile device, select Smart Notifications > Pair with Chartplotter.

5 Follow the on-screen instructions to pair the app to the GPSMAP device.

6 When prompted, enter the key on your mobile device.

7 If necessary, adjust which notifications you receive in your mobile device settings.

Receiving Notifications

WARNING

Do not read or reply to notifications while operating the vessel. Failure to pay attention to the conditions on the

water can result in vessel damage, personal injury, or death.

Before your GPSMAP device can receive notifications, you must connect it to your mobile device and enable the

Smart Notifications feature (Enabling Smart Notifications, page23).

When the Smart Notifications feature is enabled and your mobile device receives a notification, a pop-up

notification appears on the GPSMAP screen briefly.

NOTE: The available actions depend on the type of notification and your phone operating system.

• To answer a phone call on your phone, select Answer.

TIP: Have your phone nearby. The phone call is answered on your mobile phone, not on the chartplotter.

• To not answer the phone call, select Decline.

• To review the full message, select Review.

• To dismiss the pop-up notification, select OK or wait for the notification to close automatically.

• To remove the notification from the chartplotter and your mobile device, select Clear.

ActiveCaptain App 23

Managing Notifications

WARNING

Do not read or reply to notifications while operating the vessel. Failure to pay attention to the conditions on the

water can result in vessel damage, personal injury, or death.

Before you can manage the notifications, you must enable the Smart Notifications feature (Enabling Smart

Notifications, page23).

When the Smart Notifications feature is enabled and your mobile device receives a notification, a pop-up

notification appears on the GPSMAP screen briefly. You can access and manage the notifications from the

ActiveCaptain screen.

1 Select ActiveCaptain > Smart Notifications > Messages.

A list of notifications appear.

2 Select a notification.

3 Select an option:

NOTE: The available options vary based on your mobile device and the notification type.

• To dismiss and remove the notification from the chartplotter and your mobile device, select Clear or

Delete.

NOTE: This does not delete the message from the mobile device. This only dismisses and removes the

notification.

• To call the phone number back, select Call Back or Dial.

Making Notifications Private

You can turn off the pop-up notifications and disable the messages list on specific chartplotters for privacy. For

example, the captain could disable pop-up notifications and messages on the chartplotter used for fishing, but

allow notifications on the chartplotter used at the helm.

1 From the chartplotter you want notifications to be private, select ActiveCaptain > Smart Notifications.

2 Select an option:

• To turn off pop-up notifications on this chartplotter, select Popups.

• To turn off pop-up notifications and disable access to the messages list on this chartplotter, select

Visibility.

Updating Software with the ActiveCaptain App

If your device has Wi‑Fi technology, you can use the ActiveCaptain app to download and install the latest

software updates for your device.

NOTICE

Software updates may require the app to download large files. Regular data limits or charges from your Internet

service provider apply. Contact your Internet service provider for more information about data limits or charges.

The installation process can take several minutes.

1 Connect the mobile device to the GPSMAP device (Getting Started with the ActiveCaptain App, page22).

2 When a software update is available and you have internet access on your mobile device, select Software

Updates > Download.

The ActiveCaptain app downloads the update to the mobile device. When you reconnect the app to the

GPSMAP device, the update is transferred to the device. After the transfer is complete, you are prompted to

install the update.

3 When you are prompted by the GPSMAP device, select an option to install the update.

• To update the software immediately, select OK.

• To delay the update, select Cancel. When you are ready to install the update, select ActiveCaptain >

Software Updates > Install Now.

24 ActiveCaptain App

Updating Charts with ActiveCaptain

You can use the ActiveCaptain app to download and transfer the latest chart updates for your device. To

save space on your mobile device, space on the ActiveCaptain card, and download time, consider using the

ActiveCaptain app to download only the areas of the chart you need.

If you are downloading an entire chart, you can use the Garmin Express

™

app to download the map onto

a memory card (Updating Your Charts Using the Garmin Express App, page181). The Garmin Express app

downloads large charts more quickly than the ActiveCaptain app.

NOTICE

Chart updates may require the app to download large files. Regular data limits or charges from your internet

service provider apply. Contact your internet service provider for more information about data limits or charges.

1 Connect the mobile device to the GPSMAP device (Getting Started with the ActiveCaptain App, page22).

2 When a chart update is available, and you have internet access on your mobile device, select OneChart > My

Charts.

3 Select the map to update.

4 Select the area to download.

5 Select Download.

The ActiveCaptain app downloads the update to the mobile device. When you reconnect the app to the

GPSMAP device, the update is transferred to the device. After the transfer is complete, the updated charts

are available for use.

Chart Subscriptions

A chart subscription allows you to access the latest chart updates and additional content using the

ActiveCaptain mobile app or the Garmin Express desktop app. You can download updated charts and content

each day.

You can purchase chart subscriptions in a variety of ways.

• Digital purchase in the ActiveCaptain mobile app

• Digital purchase on garmin.com

• Physical chart card purchase at a retail location or through garmin.com or navionics.com

• Physical chart upgrade card purchase at a retail location (for upgrading the built-in charts)

Purchasing a Chart Subscription with ActiveCaptain

1 Connect your mobile device to the internet and open the ActiveCaptain app.

2 Select Chart > > My Charts > Add a Subscription.

3 Select a chart.

4 Select Subscribe Now.

NOTE: It might take a few hours to display the new subscription.

Activating the Chart Subscription Card

If you purchased a chart subscription memory card, you must activate it before you can use it.

1 Insert the purchased chart subscription card into a memory card slot on the chartplotter.

2 Open the ActiveCaptain app on your mobile device, and connect it to the internet.

3 Disconnect your mobile device from the internet, and connect it to the chartplotter (Getting Started with the

ActiveCaptain App, page22).

The ActiveCaptain app activates the subscription automatically after it connects to the internet and then to

the chartplotter. The ActiveCaptain app displays the new subscription in the My Charts list.

NOTE: It might take a few hours to display the new subscription.

ActiveCaptain App 25

Downloading Updated Charts

If you have a chart subscription, you can download updated content regularly. You can use the ActiveCaptain

app to download and transfer the latest chart updates for your device. To save space on your mobile device,

space on the ActiveCaptain card, and download time, consider using the ActiveCaptain app to download only

the areas of the chart you need.

If you purchased the subscription using the ActiveCaptain app, the content is downloaded automatically each

day you open the ActiveCaptain app.

If you purchased a subscription card or are updating a built-in chart, you need to follow the steps below once.

Then, the content is downloaded automatically each day you open the ActiveCaptain app.

1 When a chart update is available, and you have internet access on your mobile device, open the

ActiveCaptain app on your mobile device.

2 Select Chart > > My Charts.

3 Select the map to update.

4 Select the area to download.

5 Select Download.

The ActiveCaptain app downloads the update to the mobile device.

6 Connect the mobile device to the GPSMAP device (Getting Started with the ActiveCaptain App, page22).

7 From the GPSMAP device, select Vessel > ActiveCaptain > OneChart.

The chart update is transferred to the ActiveCaptain device. After the transfer is complete, the updated

charts are available for use.

Renewing Your Subscription

Your cartography subscription expires after one year. After the subscription expires, you can continue using the

downloaded charts, but you are not able to download the latest chart updates or additional content.

1 Connect your mobile device to the internet and open the ActiveCaptain app.

2 Select Chart > > My Charts.

3 Select the chart to renew.

4 Select Renew Now.

NOTE: It might take a few hours to display the renewed subscription.

Communication with Wireless Devices

The chartplotters can create a wireless network to which you can connect wireless devices.

Connecting wireless devices allows you to use Garmin apps, such as ActiveCaptain.

Wi‑Fi Network

Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network

This device can host a Wi‑Fi network to which you can connect wireless devices. The first time you access the

wireless network settings, you are prompted to set up the network.

1 Select Settings > Communications > Wi-Fi Network > Wi-Fi > On > OK.

2 If necessary, enter a name for this wireless network.

3 Enter a password.

You will need this password to access the wireless network from a wireless device. The password is

case-sensitive.

26 Communication with Wireless Devices

Connecting a Wireless Device to the Chartplotter

Before you can connect a wireless device to the chartplotter wireless network, you must configure the

chartplotter wireless network (Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network, page26).

You can connect multiple wireless devices to the chartplotter to share data.

1 From the wireless device, turn on the Wi‑Fi technology and search for wireless networks.

2 Select the name of your chartplotter wireless network (Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network, page26).

3 Enter the chartplotter password.

Changing the Wireless Channel

You can change the wireless channel if you have trouble finding or connecting to a device, or if you experience

interference.

1 Select Settings > Communications > Wi-Fi Network > Advanced > Channel.

2 Enter a new channel.

You do not need to change the wireless channel of devices connected to this network.

Changing the Wi‑Fi Host

If there are multiple chartplotters with Wi‑Fi technology on the Garmin marine network, you can change which

chartplotter is the Wi‑Fi host. This can be helpful if you are having trouble with Wi‑Fi communications. Changing

the Wi‑Fi host allows you to select a chartplotter that is physically closer to your mobile device.

1 Select Settings > Communications > Wi-Fi Network > Advanced > Wi-Fi Host.

2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Wireless Remote Control

These steps are not applicable to the GRID remote input devices (Pairing the GRID Device with the Chartplotter

from the Chartplotter, page21).

Pairing the Wireless Remote Control With the Chartplotter

Before you can use the wireless remote control with a chartplotter, you must pair the remote with the

chartplotter.

You can connect a single remote to multiple plotters, and then press the pairing key to switch between the

chartplotters.

1 Select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices > Wireless Remotes > GPSMAP® Remote.

2 Select New Connection.

3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Turning On and Off the Remote Backlight

Turning off the remote backlight can significantly increase the battery life.

1 On the chartplotter, select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices > Wireless Remotes > GPSMAP®

Remote > Backlight.

2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Disconnecting the Remote Control from All Chartplotters

1 On the chartplotter, select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices > Wireless Remotes > GPSMAP®

Remote > Disconnect All.

2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Communication with Wireless Devices 27

Wireless Wind Sensor

Connecting a Wireless Sensor to the Chartplotter

You can view data from a compatible wireless sensor on the chartplotter.

1 Select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices.

2 Select the wind sensor.

3 Select Enable.

The chartplotter begins searching for and connecting to the wireless sensor.

To view data from the sensor, add the data to a data field or gauge.

Adjusting the Wind Sensor Orientation

You should adjust this setting if the sensor does not face the front of the boat, exactly parallel to the center line.

NOTE: The opening where the cable connects to the pole indicates the front of the sensor.

1 Estimate the angle, in degrees clockwise around the mast, by which the sensor points away from the center

of the front of the boat:

• If the sensor is facing starboard, the angle should be between 1 and 180 degrees.

• If the sensor is facing port, the angle should be between -1 and -180 degrees.

2 Select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices.

3 Select the wind sensor.

4 Select Wind Angle Offset.

5 Enter the angle observed in step 1.

6 Select Done.

Viewing Boat Data on a Garmin Watch

You can connect a compatible Garmin watch to a compatible chartplotter to view data from the chartplotter.

1 Bring the Garmin watch within range (3 m) of the chartplotter.

2 From the watch clock screen, select START > Boat Data > START.

NOTE: If you have already connected to a chartplotter, and would like to connect to a different chartplotter,

open the Boat Data screen, hold UP, and select Pair new.

3 On the chartplotter, select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices > Connect IQ™ Apps > Boat Data >

Enable > New Connection.

The chartplotter begins searching for and connecting to the wearable device.

4 Compare the code shown on the chartplotter with the one shown on the watch.

5 If the codes match, select Yes to complete the pairing process.

After the devices are paired, they connect automatically when they are turned on and within range.

Viewing Boat Data on a Garmin Nautix

™

Device

You can connect a Garmin Nautix device to the chartplotter to view charplotter data on the Garmin Nautix

device.

NOTE: You can connect a Garmin Nautix device to multiple compatible devices for better coverage on larger

vessels.

1 Bring the a Garmin Nautix device within range (3 m) of the chartplotter.

The device automatically looks for all compatible devices within range.

2 If necessary, from the wearable device menu, select Device Connections > Pair New Device.

3 On the chartplotter, select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices > Connect IQ™ Apps > Boat Data >

Enable Connections > New Connection.

The chartplotter begins searching for and connecting to the wearable device.

After the devices are paired, they connect automatically when they are turned on and within range.

28 Communication with Wireless Devices

Charts and 3D Chart Views

The charts and 3D chart views that are available depend on the map data and accessories used.

NOTE: 3D chart views are available with premium charts, in some areas.

You can access the charts and 3D chart views by selecting Charts.

Nav. Chart: Shows navigation data available on your pre-loaded maps and from supplemental maps, if available.

The data includes buoys, lights, cables, depth soundings, marinas, and tide stations in an overhead view.

Fishing Chart: Provides a detailed view of the bottom contours and depth soundings on the chart. This

chart removes navigational data from the chart, provides detailed bathymetric data, and enhances bottom

contours for depth recognition. This chart is best for offshore deep-sea fishing.

NOTE: The Fishing chart is available with premium charts, in some areas.

Perspective 3D: Provides a view from above and behind the boat (according to your course) and provides a

visual navigation aid. This view is helpful when navigating tricky shoals, reefs, bridges, or channels, and is

beneficial when trying to identify entry and exit routes in unfamiliar harbors or anchorages.

3D Chart: Shows a detailed, three-dimensional view from above and behind the boat (according to your course)

and provides a visual navigation aid. This view is helpful when navigating tricky shoals, reefs, bridges, or

channels, and when trying to identify entry and exit routes in unfamiliar harbors or anchorages.

Fish Eye 3D: Provides an underwater view that visually represents the sea floor according to the chart

information. When a sonar transducer is connected, suspended targets (such as fish) are indicated by red,

green, and yellow spheres. Red indicates the largest targets and green indicates the smallest.

Relief Shading: Provides high resolution elevation shading of lakes and coastal waters. This chart can be

helpful for fishing and diving.

NOTE: The Relief Shading chart is available with premium charts, in some areas.

Navigation Chart and Fishing Chart

NOTE: The Fishing chart is available with premium charts, in some areas.

The Nav. Chart is optimized for navigation. You can plan a course, view map information, and use the chart as a

navigational aid. To open the Nav. Chart, select Charts > Nav. Chart.

The Fishing Chart provides a detailed view with more bottom detail and fishing content. This chart is optimized

for use when fishing. To open the Fishing Chart, select Charts > Fishing Chart.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 29

Chart Symbols

This table contains some of the common symbols you might see on the detailed charts.

Icon Description

Buoy

Information

Marine services

Tide station

Current station

Overhead photo available

Perspective photo available

Other features common to most charts include depth contour lines, intertidal zones, spot soundings (as

depicted on the original paper chart), navigational aids and symbols, obstructions, and cable areas.

Zooming In and Out Using the Touchscreen

You can quickly zoom in and out of many screens, such as the charts and sonar views.

• Pinch two fingers together to zoom out.

• Spread two fingers apart to zoom in.

Measuring a Distance on the Chart

1 From a chart, select a location.

2 Select Measure.

A push pin appears on the screen at your present location. The distance and angle from the pin is listed in

the corner.

TIP: To reset the pin and measure from the current location of the cursor, select Set Reference.

Creating a Waypoint on the Chart

1 From a chart, select a location or object.

2 Select .

Viewing Location and Object Information on a Chart

You can view information, such as tide, current, celestial, chart notes, or local services, about a location or an

object on the Navigation chart or the Fishing chart.

1 From the Navigation chart or Fishing chart, select a location or object.

A list of options appears. The options that appear vary based on the location or object you selected.

2 If necessary, select .

3 Select Information.

30 Charts and 3D Chart Views

Viewing Details about Navaids

From the Navigation chart, Fishing chart, Perspective 3D chart view, or Mariner’s Eye 3D chart view, you can

view details about various types of navigation aids, including beacons, lights, and obstructions.

NOTE: The Fishing chart is available with premium charts, in some areas.

NOTE: 3D chart views are available with premium charts, in some areas.

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select a navaid.

2 Select the name of the navaid.

Navigating to a Point on the Chart

WARNING

All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance

or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and

conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,

personal injury, or death.

The Auto Guidance feature is based on electronic chart information. That data does not ensure obstacle and

bottom clearance. Carefully compare the course to all visual sightings, and avoid any land, shallow water, or

other obstacles that may be in your path.

When using Go To, a direct course and a corrected course may pass over land or shallow water. Use visual

sightings, and steer to avoid land, shallow water, and other dangerous objects.

NOTE: The Fishing chart is available with premium charts, in some areas.

NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.

1 From the Navigation chart or Fishing chart, select a location.

2 If necessary, select Navigate To.

3 Select an option:

• To navigate directly to the location, select Go To or .

• To create a route to the location, including turns, select Route To or .

• To use Auto Guidance, select Auto Guidance or .

4 Review the course indicated by the magenta line (Route Color Coding, page49).

NOTE: When using Auto Guidance, a gray segment within any part of the magenta line indicates that Auto

Guidance cannot calculate part of the Auto Guidance line. This is due to the settings for minimum safe water

depth and minimum safe obstacle height.

5 Follow the magenta line, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 31

Premium Charts

WARNING

All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance

or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and

conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,

personal injury, or death.

The Auto Guidance feature is based on electronic chart information. That data does not ensure obstacle and

bottom clearance. Carefully compare the course to all visual sightings, and avoid any land, shallow water, or

other obstacles that may be in your path.

NOTE: Not all models support all charts.

Optional premium charts, such as Garmin Navionics Vision+

™

, allow you to get the most out of your chartplotter.

In addition to detailed marine charting, premium charts may contain these features, which are available in some

areas.

Mariner’s Eye 3D: Provides a view from above and behind the boat for a three-dimensional navigation aid.

Fish Eye 3D: Provides an underwater, three-dimensional view that visually represents the sea floor according to

the information on the chart.

Fishing Charts: Shows the chart with enhanced bottom contours and without navigational data. This chart

works well for offshore deep-sea fishing.

High Resolution Satellite Imagery: Provides high-resolution satellite images for a realistic view of the land and

water on the Navigation chart (Showing Satellite Imagery on the Navigation Chart, page34).

Aerial Photos: Shows marinas and other navigationally significant aerial photos to help you visualize your

surroundings (Viewing Aerial Photos of Landmarks, page34).

Detailed Roads and POI data: Shows detailed road and point of interest (POI) data, which includes highly

detailed coastal roads and POIs such as restaurants, lodging, and local attractions.

Auto Guidance: Uses specified information about your vessel and chart data to determine the best path to your

destination.

Sonar Imagery: Shows sonar imagery to help show the density of the bottom.

Relief Shading: Shows the gradient of the bottom with shading.

Fish Eye 3D Chart View

Using the depth contour lines of the premium charts, such as Garmin Navionics Vision+, the Fish Eye 3D chart

view provides an underwater view of the sea floor or lake bottom.

Suspended targets, such as fish, are indicated by red, green, and yellow spheres. Red indicates the largest

targets and green indicates the smallest.

32 Charts and 3D Chart Views

Viewing Tide Station Information

WARNING

Tide and current information is for information purposes only. It is your responsibility to heed all posted

water-related guidance, to remain aware of your surroundings, and to use safe judgment in, on, and around the

water at all times. Failure to heed this warning could result in property damage, serious personal injury, or death.

The icon on the chart indicates a tide station. You can view a detailed graph for a tide station to help predict

the tide level at different times or on different days.

NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.

1 From the Navigation chart or Fishing chart, select a tide station.

Tide direction and tide level information appear near .

2 Select the station name.

Animated Tide and Current Indicators

WARNING

Tide and current information is for information purposes only. It is your responsibility to heed all posted

water-related guidance, to remain aware of your surroundings, and to use safe judgment in, on, and around the

water at all times. Failure to heed this warning could result in property damage, serious personal injury, or death.

NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.

You can view indicators for animated tide station and current direction on the Navigation chart or the Fishing

chart. You must also enable animated icons in the chart settings (Showing Tides and Current Indicators,

page33).

An indicator for a tide station appears on the chart as a vertical bar graph with an arrow. A red arrow pointing

downward indicates a falling tide, and a blue arrow pointing upward indicates a rising tide. When you move the

cursor over the tide station indicator, the height of the tide at the station appears above the station indicator.

Current direction indicators appear as arrows on the chart. The direction of each arrow indicates the direction

of the current at a specific location on the chart. The color of the current arrow indicates the range of speed for

the current at that location. When you move the cursor over the current direction indicator, the specific current

speed at the location appears above the direction indicator.

Color Current Speed Range

Yellow 0 to 1 knot

Orange 1 to 2 knots

Red 2 or more knots

Showing Tides and Current Indicators

NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.

You can show static or animated tide and current station indicators on the Navigation chart or Fishing chart.

1 From the Navigation or Fishing chart, select Options > Layers > Chart > Tides & Currents.

2 Select an option:

• To show animated tide station indicators and animated current direction indicators on the chart, select

Animated.

• To enables the tides and current slider, which sets the time for which tides and currents are reported on

the map, select Slider.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 33

Showing Satellite Imagery on the Navigation Chart

NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.

You can overlay high-resolution satellite images on the land or on both land and sea portions of the Navigation

chart.

NOTE: When enabled, high-resolution satellite images are present only at lower zoom levels. If you cannot see

high-resolution images in your optional chart region, you can select to zoom in. You also can set the detail

level higher by changing the map zoom detail.

1 From the Navigation chart, select Options > Layers > Chart > Satellite Photos.

2 Select an option:

• Select Land Only to show standard chart information on the water, with photos overlaying the land.

NOTE: This setting must be enabled to view Standard Mapping

charts.

• Select Photo Map to show photos on both the water and the land at a specified opacity. Use the slider bar

to adjust the photo opacity. The higher you set the percentage, the more the satellite photos cover both

land and water.

Viewing Aerial Photos of Landmarks

Before you can view aerial photos on the Navigation chart, you must turn on the Photo Points setting in the

chart setup (Chart Layers, page40).

NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.

You can use aerial photographs of landmarks, marinas, and harbors to help orient yourself to your surroundings

or to acquaint yourself with a marina or a harbor prior to arrival.

1 From the Navigation chart, select a camera icon:

• To view an overhead photo, select .

• To view a perspective photo, select . The photo was taken from the location of the camera, pointed

in the direction of the cone.

2 Select Photo.

Automatic Identification System

The Automatic Identification System (AIS) enables you to identify and track other vessels, and alerts you to

area traffic. When connected to an external AIS device, the chartplotter can show some AIS information about

other vessels that are within range, that are equipped with a transponder, and that are actively transmitting AIS

information.

The information reported for each vessel includes the Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI), location, GPS

speed, GPS heading, time that has elapsed since the last position of the vessel was reported, nearest approach,

and time to the nearest approach.

Some chartplotter models also support Blue Force Tracking. Vessels being tracked with Blue Force Tracking are

indicated on the chartplotter with a blue-green color.

34 Charts and 3D Chart Views

AIS Targeting Symbols

Symbol Description

AIS vessel. The vessel is reporting AIS information. The direction in which the triangle is pointing

indicates the direction in which the AIS vessel is moving.

Target is selected.

Target is activated. The target appears larger on the chart. A green line attached to the target

indicates the heading of the target. The MMSI, speed, and direction of the vessel appear beneath the

target, if the details setting has been set to Show. If the AIS transmission from the vessel is lost, a

message banner appears.

Target is lost. A green X indicates that the AIS transmission from the vessel is lost, and the

chartplotter displays a message banner asking whether the vessel should continue to be tracked.

If you discontinue vessel tracking, the lost target symbol disappears from the chart or the 3D chart

view.

Dangerous target in range. The target flashes while an alarm sounds and a message banner

appears. After the alarm has been acknowledged, a solid red triangle with a red line attached to it

indicates the location and the heading of the target. If the safe-zone collision alarm has been set to

Off, the target flashes, but the audible alarm does not sound and the alarm banner does not appear.

If the AIS transmission from the vessel is lost, a message banner appears.

Dangerous target is lost. A red X indicates that the AIS transmission from the vessel is lost, and the

chartplotter displays a message banner asking whether the vessel should continue to be tracked. If

you discontinue vessel tracking, the lost dangerous target symbol disappears from the chart or the

3D chart view.

The location of this symbol indicates the closest point of approach to a dangerous target, and the

numbers near the symbol indicate the time to the closest point of approach to that target.

NOTE: Vessels being tracked with the Blue Force Tracking feature are indicated with a blue-green color

regardless of their status.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 35

Heading and Projected Course of Activated AIS Targets

When heading and course over ground information are provided by an activated AIS target, the heading of the

target appears on a chart as a solid line attached to the AIS target symbol. A heading line does not appear on a

3D chart view.

The projected course of an activated AIS target appears as a dashed line on a chart or a 3D chart view. The

length of the projected course line is based on the value of the projected heading setting. If an activated AIS

target is not transmitting speed information, or if the vessel is not moving, a projected course line does not

appear. Changes in the speed, course over ground, or rate of turn information transmitted by the vessel can

impact the calculation of the projected course line.

When course over ground, heading, and rate of turn information are provided by an activated AIS target, the

projected course of the target is calculated based on the course over ground and the rate of turn information.

The direction in which the target is turning, which is also based on the rate of turn information, is indicated by

the direction of the barb at the end of the heading line. The length of the barb does not change.

When course over ground and heading information are provided by an activated AIS target, but rate of turn

information is not provided, the projected course of the target is calculated based on the course over ground

information.

Activating a Target for an AIS Vessel

1 From a chart or a 3D chart view, select an AIS vessel.

2 Select AIS Vessel > Activate Target.

Viewing Information about a Targeted AIS Vessel

You can view the AIS signal status, MMSI, GPS speed, GPS heading, and other information that is reported about

a targeted AIS vessel.

1 From a chart or a 3D chart view, select an AIS vessel.

2 Select AIS Vessel.

Deactivating a Target for an AIS Vessel

1 From a chart or a 3D chart view, select an AIS vessel.

2 Select AIS Vessel > Deactivate.

Viewing a List of AIS and MARPA Threats

From any Radar screen or the Radar overlay, you can view and customize the appearance of a list of AIS and

MARPA threats.

1 From a Radar screen, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels.

2 Select an option:

• To view a list of AIS threats, select AIS > AIS List.

• To view a list of MARPA threats, select MARPA > MARPA List.

3 If necessary, select Display Options > Show, and select the type of threats to include in the list.

36 Charts and 3D Chart Views

Setting the Safe-Zone Collision Alarm

CAUTION

The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page164). Failure

to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.

Before you can set a collision alarm, you must connect an AIS device or radar to the same network as a

compatible chartplotter.

The safe-zone collision alarm is used only with AIS and MARPA. MARPA functionality works with radar. The

safe zone is used for collision avoidance and can be customized.

1 Select Settings > Alarms > Collision Alarm > On.

A message banner appears and an alarm sounds when a MARPA-tagged object or an AIS-activated vessel

enters the safe-zone area around your boat. The object is also labeled as dangerous on the screen. When the

alarm is off, the message banner and audible alarm are disabled, but the object is still labeled as dangerous

on the screen.

2 Select Range, and select a distance for the safe-zone radius around your vessel.

3 Select Time To, and select a time at which the alarm will sound if a target is determined to intersect the safe

zone.

For example, to be notified of a pending intersection 10 minutes before it will likely occur, set Time To to 10,

and the alarm will sound 10 minutes before the vessel intersects the safe zone.

4 Select MARPA Alarm, and select an option for when the alarm sounds for MARPA-tagged objects.

Viewing a List of AIS and MARPA Threats

From any Radar screen or the Radar overlay, you can view and customize the appearance of a list of AIS and

MARPA threats.

1 From a Radar screen, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels.

2 Select an option:

• To view a list of AIS threats, select AIS > AIS List.

• To view a list of MARPA threats, select MARPA > MARPA List.

3 If necessary, select Display Options > Show, and select the type of threats to include in the list.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 37

AIS Aids to Navigation

An AIS aid to navigation (ATON) is any kind of navigational aid that is transmitted over the AIS radio. ATONs are

displayed on the charts and have identifying information, such as position and type.

There are three main kinds of AIS ATONs. Real ATONs physically exist and send their identifying and location

information from their actual location. Synthetic ATONs physically exist, and their identifying and location

information is sent from another location. Virtual ATONs do not actually exist, and their identifying and location

information is sent from another location.

You can view AIS ATONs on the chart when the chartplotter is connected to a compatible AIS radio. To show

AIS ATONs, from a chart, select Options > Layers > Chart > Navaid > ATONs. You can view more information

about an ATON if you select the ATON on the chart.

Symbol Meaning

Real or synthetic ATON

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark North

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark South

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark East

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark West

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark Special

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark Safe

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark Danger

Virtual ATON

Virtual ATON: Topmark North

Virtual ATON: Topmark South

Virtual ATON: Topmark East

Virtual ATON: Topmark West

Virtual ATON: Topmark Special

Virtual ATON: Topmark Safe

Virtual ATON: Topmark Danger

38 Charts and 3D Chart Views

AIS Distress Signals

Self-contained AIS distress signal devices transmit emergency position reports when activated. The chartplotter

can receive signals from Search and Rescue Transmitters (SART), Emergency Position Indicating Radio

Beacons (EPIRB), and other man overboard signals. Distress signal transmissions are different than standard

AIS transmissions, so they appear differently on the chartplotter. Instead of tracking a distress signal

transmission for collision avoidance, you track a distress signal transmission to locate and assist a vessel

or person.

Navigating to a Distress Signal Transmission

When you receive a distress signal transmission, a distress signal alarm appears.

Select Review > Go To to begin navigation to the transmission.

AIS Distress Signal Device Targeting Symbols

Symbol Description

AIS distress signal device transmission. Select to see more information about the transmission and

begin navigation.

Transmission lost.

Transmission test. Appears when a vessel initiates a test of their distress signal device, and does not

represent a true emergency.

Transmission test lost.

Enabling AIS Transmission Test Alerts

To avoid a large number of test alerts and symbols in crowded areas such as marinas, you can select to receive

or ignore AIS test messages. To test an AIS emergency device, you must enable the chartplotter to receive test

alerts.

1 Select Settings > Alarms > AIS.

2 Select an option:

• To receive or ignore Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon (EPRIB) test signals, select AIS-EPIRB

Test.

• To receive or ignore Man Overboard (MOB) test signals, select AIS-MOB Test.

• To receive or ignore Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) test signals, select AIS-SART Test.

Turning Off AIS Reception

AIS signal reception is turned on by default.

Select Settings > Other Vessels > AIS > Off.

All AIS functionality on all charts and 3D chart views is disabled. This includes AIS vessel targeting and

tracking, collision alarms that result from AIS vessel targeting and tracking, and the display of information

about AIS vessels.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 39

Chart Menu

NOTE: Not all settings apply to all charts. Some options require premium maps or connected accessories, such

as radar.

NOTE: The menus may contain some settings that are not supported by your installed charts or your present

location. If you make changes to those settings, the changes will not impact the chart view.

From a chart, select Options.

Layers: Adjusts the appearance of the different items on the charts (Chart Layers, page40).

Quickdraw Contours: Turns on bottom contour drawing, and allows you to create fishing map labels (Garmin

Quickdraw Contours Mapping, page45).

Settings: Adjusts the chart settings (Chart Settings, page44).

Edit Overlays: Adjusts the data shown on the screen (Customizing the Data Overlays, page17).

Chart Layers

You can turn on and off chart layers and customize features of the charts. Each setting is specific to the chart

or chart view being used.

NOTE: Not all settings apply to all charts and chartplotter models. Some options require premium maps or

connected accessories.

NOTE: The menus may contain some settings that are not supported by your installed charts or your present

location. If you make changes to those settings, the changes will not impact the chart view.

From a chart, select Options > Layers.

Chart: Shows and hides chart-related items (Chart Layer Settings, page40).

My Vessel: Shows and hides items relating to the boat (My Vessel Layer Settings, page41).

User Data: Shows and hides user data, such as waypoints, boundaries, and tracks, and opens user data lists

(User Data Layer Settings, page42).

Other Vessels: Adjusts how other vessels are shown (Other Vessels Layer Settings, page42).

Water: Shows and hides depth items (Water Layer Settings, page42).

Quickdraw Contours: Shows and hides Garmin Quickdraw Contours data (Garmin Quickdraw Contours Settings,

page48).

Weather: Shows and hides weather-related items (Weather Layer Settings, page43).

Chart Layer Settings

From a chart, select Options > Layers > Chart.

Satellite Photos: Shows high-resolution satellite images on the land or on both land and sea portions of the

Navigation chart, when certain premium maps are used (Showing Satellite Imagery on the Navigation Chart,

page34).

NOTE: This setting must be enabled to view Standard Mapping charts.

Tides & Currents: Shows current station indicators and tide station indicators on the chart (Showing Tides and

Current Indicators, page33) and enables the tides and current slider, which sets the time for which tides and

currents are reported on the map.

Land POIs: Shows points of interest on land.

Navaid: Shows navigational aids, such as ATONs and flashing lights, on the chart. Allows you to select NOAA or

IALA navaid type.

Service Points: Shows locations for marine services.

Depth: Adjusts the items on the depth layer (Depth Layer Settings, page41).

Restricted Areas: Shows information about restricted areas on the chart.

Photo Points: Shows camera icons for aerial photos (Viewing Aerial Photos of Landmarks, page34).

40 Charts and 3D Chart Views

Depth Layer Settings

From a chart, select Options > Layers > Chart > Depth.

Depth Shading: Specifies an upper and lower depth to shade between.

Shallow Shading: Sets the shades from the shoreline to the specified depth.

Spot Depths: Turns on spot soundings and sets a dangerous depth. Spot depths that are equal to or more

shallow than the dangerous depth are indicated by red text.

Fishing Contours: Sets the zoom level for a detailed view of bottom contours and depth soundings and

simplifies map presentation for optimal use while fishing.

My Vessel Layer Settings

From a chart, select Options > Layers > My Vessel.

Heading Line: Shows and adjusts the heading line, which is a line drawn on the map from the bow of the boat in

the direction of travel (Setting the Heading Line and Angle Markers, page69).

Active Tracks: Shows the active track on the chart and opens the Active Track Options menu.

Wind Rose: Shows a visual representation of the wind angle or direction provided by the connected wind sensor

and sets the wind source.

Compass Rose: Shows a compass rose around your boat, indicating compass direction oriented to the heading

of the boat. Enabling this option disables the Wind Rose option.

Vessel Icon: Sets the icon that represents your present location on the chart.

Laylines Settings

To use the laylines features, you must connect a wind sensor to the chartplotter.

When in sailing mode (Setting the Vessel Type, page13), you can display laylines on the navigation chart.

Laylines can be very helpful when racing.

From the Navigation chart, select Options > Layers > My Vessel > Laylines > Setup.

Sailing Ang.: Allows you to select how the device calculates laylines. The Actual option calculates the laylines

using the measured wind angle from the wind sensor. The Manual option calculates the laylines using

manually entered windward and leeward angles. The Polar Table option calculates the laylines based on the

imported polar table data (Importing a Polar Table Manually, page65).

Windward Ang.: Allows you to set a layline based on the windward sailing angle.

Leeward Ang.: Allows you to set a layline based on the leeward sailing angle.

Tide Correction: Corrects the laylines based on the tide.

Layline Filter: Filters the layline data based on the time interval entered. For a smoother layline that filters out

some of the changes in the boat's heading or true wind angle, enter a higher number. For laylines that display

a higher sensitivity to changes in the boat's heading or true wind angle, enter a lower number.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 41

User Data Layer Settings

You can show user data, such as waypoints, boundaries, and tracks, on the charts.

From a chart, select Options > Layers > User Data.

Waypoints: Shows waypoints on the chart and opens the list of waypoints.

Boundaries: Shows boundaries on the chart and opens the list of boundaries.

Tracks: Shows tracks on the chart.

Other Vessels Layer Settings

NOTE: These options require connected accessories, such as an AIS receiver, radar, or VHF radio.

From a chart, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels.

DSC: Sets how DSC vessels and trails appear on the chart, and shows the DSC list.

AIS: Sets how AIS vessels and trails appear on the chart, and shows the AIS list.

MARPA: Sets how MARPA vessels and trails appear on the chart, and shows the MARPA list.

Details: Shows other vessel details on the chart.

Proj. Heading: Sets the projected heading time for AIS-activated and MARPA-tagged vessels.

Collision Alarm: Sets the safe-zone collision alarm (Setting the Safe-Zone Collision Alarm, page37).

Water Layer Settings

From a chart, select Options > Layers > Water.

NOTE: The menu may contain some settings that are not supported by your installed charts or your present

location. If you make changes to those settings, the changes will not impact the chart view.

NOTE: Not all settings apply to all charts, views, and chartplotter models. Some options require premium maps

or connected accessories.

Depth Shading: Specifies an upper and lower depth to shade between (Depth Range Shading, page43).

Shallow Shading: Sets the shades from the shoreline to the specified depth.

Spot Depths: Turns on spot soundings and sets a dangerous depth. Spot depths that are equal to or more

shallow than the dangerous depth are indicated by red text.

Fishing Contours: Sets the zoom level for a detailed view of bottom contours and depth soundings and

simplifies map presentation for optimal use while fishing.

Relief Shading: Shows the gradient of the bottom with shading. This feature is available only with some

premium maps.

Sonar Imagery: Shows sonar imagery to help show the density of the bottom. This feature is available only with

some premium maps.

Lake Level: Sets the present water level of the lake. This feature is available only with some premium maps.

42 Charts and 3D Chart Views

Depth Range Shading

You can set color ranges on your map to show the water depths where your target fish are currently biting. You

can set deeper ranges to monitor how quickly the bottom depth changes within a specific depth range. You can

create up to ten depth ranges. For inland fishing, a maximum of five depth ranges can help reduce map clutter.

The depth ranges apply to all charts and all bodies of water.

Some Garmin LakeVü

™

and premium supplemental charts have multiple depth range shading by default.

Red From 0 to 1.5m (from 0 to 5ft.)

Orange From 1.5 to 3m (from 5 to 10ft.)

Yellow From 3 to 4.5m (from 10 to 15ft.)

Green From 4.5 to 7.6m (from 15 to 25ft.)

To turn on and adjust, from a chart, select Options > Layers > Water > Depth Shading.

Weather Layer Settings

From the Navigation or Fishing chart, select Options > Layers > Chart > Weather > .

From a weather chart, select Options > Layers > Chart > Weather.

Observed Layers: Sets which observed weather items are shown. Observed weather is the present weather

condition that are visible now.

Forecast Layers: Sets which forecasted weather items are shown.

Layer Mode: Shows forecasted or observed weather information.

Loop: Shows a loop of forecasted or observed weather information.

Legend: Shows the weather legend, with the severity of the conditions increasing from left to right.

Weather Subscription: Shows weather subscription information.

Restore Defaults: Resets the weather settings to factory default values.

Edit Overlays: Adjusts the data shown on the screen (Customizing the Data Overlays, page17).

Charts and 3D Chart Views 43

Radar Overlay Settings

From the Navigation or Fishing chart, select Options > Layers > Radar > .

From a radar screen, select Options.

Radar To Standby: Stops radar transmission.

Gain: Adjusts the gain (Adjusting Gain on the Radar Screen Automatically, page102).

Sea Clutter: Adjusts the sea clutter (Adjusting Gain on the Radar Screen Automatically, page102).

Radar Options: Opens the radar options menu (Radar Options Menu, page105).

Other Vessels: Sets how other vessels are displayed on the radar view (Other Vessels Layer Settings, page42).

Radar Setup: Opens the radar display settings (Radar Setup Menu, page105).

Edit Overlays: Adjusts the data shown on the screen (Customizing the Data Overlays, page17).

Chart Settings

NOTE: Not all settings apply to all charts and 3D chart views. Some settings require external accessories or

applicable premium charts.

From a chart, select Options > Settings.

Map Orientation: Sets the perspective of the map.

Look Ahead: Shifts your present location toward the bottom of the screen automatically as your speed

increases. Enter your top speed for the best results.

Vessel Orientation: Sets the alignment of the vessel icon on the map. The Auto option aligns the vessel icon

using GPS COG at high speeds and the magnetic heading at low speeds to better align the vessel icon with

the active track line. The Heading option aligns the vessel icon with the magnetic heading. The GPS Heading

(COG) option aligns the vessel icon using GPS COG. If the selected data source is not available, the available

data source is used instead.

WARNING

The vessel orientation setting is for informational purposes and is not intended to be precisely followed. Always

defer to the navaids and conditions on the water to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel

damage, personal injury, or death.

Detail: Adjusts the amount of detail shown on the map, at different zoom levels.

Chart Size: Sets the visible size of the chart.

World Map: Uses either a basic world map or a shaded relief map on the chart. These differences are visible

only when zoomed out too far to see the detailed charts.

Start Line: Sets the starting line for the sailing race (Setting the Starting Line, page63).

Inset Map: Shows a small map centered on your present location.

Fish Eye 3D Settings

NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.

From the Fish Eye 3D chart view, select Options.

View: Sets the perspective of the 3D chart view.

Tracks: Shows tracks.

Sonar Cone: Shows a cone that indicates the area covered by the transducer.

Fish Symbols: Shows suspended targets.

Supported Maps

To help you have a safe and enjoyable time on the water, Garmin devices only support official maps produced

by Garmin or an approved third party producer.

You can purchase maps from Garmin. If you purchase maps from a seller other than Garmin, investigate the

seller before purchasing. Be extra cautious with online sellers. If you have purchased an unsupported map,

return it to the seller.

44 Charts and 3D Chart Views

Garmin Quickdraw Contours Mapping

WARNING

The Garmin Quickdraw Contours mapping feature allows users to generate maps. Garmin makes no

representations about the accuracy, reliability, completeness or timeliness of the maps generated by third

parties. Any use or reliance on the maps generated by third parties is at your own risk.

The Garmin Quickdraw Contours mapping feature allows you to instantly create maps with contours and depth

labels for any body of water.

When Garmin Quickdraw Contours records data, a colored circle surrounds the vessel icon. This circle

represents the approximate area of the map that is scanned by each pass.

A green circle indicates good depth and GPS position, and a speed under 16km/h (10mph). A yellow circle

indicates good depth and GPS position, and a speed between 16 and 32km/h (10 and 20mph). A red circle

indicates poor depth or GPS position, and a speed above 32km/h (20mph).

You can view Garmin Quickdraw Contours in a combination screen or as a single view on the map.

The amount of saved data depends on the size of your memory card, your sonar source, and the speed of your

boat as you record data. You can record longer when you use a single-beam sonar. It is estimated that you

might be able to record about 1,500hours of data onto a 2GB memory card.

When you record data on a memory card in your chartplotter, the new data is added to your existing Garmin

Quickdraw Contours map, and is saved on the memory card. When you insert a new memory card, the existing

data does not transfer onto the new card.

Mapping a Body of Water Using the Garmin Quickdraw Contours Feature

Before you can use the Garmin Quickdraw Contours feature, you must have sonar depth, your GPS position, and

a memory card with free space.

1 From a chart view, select Options > Quickdraw Contours > Start Recording.

2 When recording is complete, select Options > Quickdraw Contours > Stop Recording.

3 Select Manage > Name, and enter a name for the map.

Adding a Label to a Garmin Quickdraw Contours Map

You can add labels to a Garmin Quickdraw Contours map to mark hazards or points of interest.

1 From the Navigation chart, select a location.

2 Select Quickdraw Lbl..

3 Enter text for the label, and select Done.

Garmin Quickdraw Contours Mapping 45

Garmin Quickdraw Community

The Garmin Quickdraw Community is a free, public, online community that enables you to download maps other

users have created. You can share your Garmin Quickdraw Contours maps with others.

If your device has Wi‑Fi technology, you can use the ActiveCaptain app to access the Garmin Quickdraw

Community (Connecting to the Garmin Quickdraw Community with ActiveCaptain, page46).

If your device does not have Wi‑Fi technology, you can use the Garmin Connect

™

website to access the Garmin

Quickdraw Community (Connecting to the Garmin Quickdraw Community with Garmin Connect, page46).

Connecting to the Garmin Quickdraw Community with ActiveCaptain

1 From your mobile device, open the ActiveCaptain app and connect to the GPSMAP device (Getting Started

with the ActiveCaptain App, page22).

2 From the app, select Quickdraw Community.

You can download contours from others in the community (Downloading Garmin Quickdraw Community Maps

Using ActiveCaptain, page46) and share the contours you have created (Sharing Your Garmin Quickdraw

Contours Maps with the Garmin Quickdraw Community Using ActiveCaptain, page46).

Downloading Garmin Quickdraw Community Maps Using ActiveCaptain

You can download Garmin Quickdraw Contours maps that other users have created and shared with the Garmin

Quickdraw Community.

1 From the ActiveCaptain app on your mobile device, select Quickdraw Community > Search for Contours.

2 Use the map and search features to locate an area to download.

The red dots represent Garmin Quickdraw Contours maps that have been shared for that area.

3 Select Select Download Region.

4 Drag the box to select the area to download.

5 Drag the corners to change the download area.

6 Select Download Area.

The next time you connect the ActiveCaptain app to the GPSMAP device, the downloaded contours are

transferred to the device automatically.

Sharing Your Garmin Quickdraw Contours Maps with the Garmin Quickdraw Community Using

ActiveCaptain

You can share Garmin Quickdraw Contours maps that you have created with others in the Garmin Quickdraw

Community.

When you share a contour map, only the contour map is shared. Your waypoints are not shared.

When you set up your ActiveCaptain app, you may have selected to share your contours with the community

automatically. If not, follow these steps to enable sharing.

From the ActiveCaptain app on your mobile device, select Sync with Plotter > Contribute to Community.

The next time you connect the ActiveCaptain app to the GPSMAP device, your contour maps are transferred to

the community automatically.

Connecting to the Garmin Quickdraw Community with Garmin Connect

1 Go to connect.garmin.com.

2 Select Getting Started > Quickdraw Community > Getting Started.

3 If you do not have a Garmin Connect account, create one.

4 Sign in to your Garmin Connect account.

5 Select Dashboards > Marine to open the Garmin Quickdraw widget.

TIP: Make sure you have a memory card in your computer to share Garmin Quickdraw Contours maps.

46 Garmin Quickdraw Contours Mapping

Sharing Your Garmin Quickdraw Contours Maps with the Garmin Quickdraw Community Using Garmin

Connect

You can share Garmin Quickdraw Contours maps that you have created with others in the Garmin Quickdraw

Community.

When you share a contour map, only the contour map is shared. Your waypoints are not shared.

1 Insert a memory card into the card slot (Memory Cards, page9).

2 Insert the memory card into your computer.

3 Access the Garmin Quickdraw Community (Connecting to the Garmin Quickdraw Community with Garmin

Connect, page46).

4 Select Share Your Contours.

5 Browse to your memory card, and select the /Garmin folder.

6 Open the Quickdraw folder, and select the file named ContoursLog.svy.

After the file is uploaded, delete the ContoursLog.svy file from your memory card to avoid issues with future

uploads. Your data will not be lost.

Downloading Garmin Quickdraw Community Maps Using Garmin Connect

You can download Garmin Quickdraw Contours maps that other users have created and shared with the Garmin

Quickdraw Community.

If your device does not have Wi‑Fi technology, you can access the Garmin Quickdraw Community using the

Garmin Connect website.

If your device has Wi‑Fi technology, you should access the Garmin Quickdraw Community using the

ActiveCaptain app (Connecting to the Garmin Quickdraw Community with ActiveCaptain, page46).

1 Insert the memory card into your computer.

2 Access the Garmin Quickdraw Community (Connecting to the Garmin Quickdraw Community with Garmin

Connect, page46).

3 Select Search for Contours.

4 Use the map and search features to locate an area to download.

The red dots represent Garmin Quickdraw Contours maps that have been shared for that region.

5 Select Select an Area to Download.

6 Drag the edges of the box to select the area to download.

7 Select Start Download.

8 Save the file to your memory card.

TIP: If you cannot find the file, look in the "Downloads" folder. The browser may have saved the file there.

9 Remove the memory card from your computer.

10 Insert the memory card into the card slot (Memory Cards, page9).

The chartplotter automatically recognizes the contours maps. The chartplotter may take a few minutes to

load the maps.

Garmin Quickdraw Contours Mapping 47

Garmin Quickdraw Contours Settings

From a chart, select Options > Quickdraw Contours > Settings.

Recording Offset: Sets the distance between the sonar depth and the contour recording depth. If the water

level has changed since your last recording, adjust this setting so the recording depth is the same for both

recordings.

For example, if the last time you recorded had a sonar depth of 3.1m (10.5ft.), and today's sonar depth is

3.6m (12ft.), enter -0.5m (-1.5ft.) for the a Recording Offset value.

User Display Offset: Sets differences in contour depths and depth labels on your own contours maps to

compensate for changes in the water level of a body of water, or for depth errors in recorded maps.

Comm. Display Offset: Sets differences in contour depths and depth labels on the community contours maps to

compensate for changes in the water level of a body of water, or for depth errors in recorded maps.

Survey Coloring: Sets the color of the Garmin Quickdraw Contours display. When this setting is turned on, the

colors indicate the quality of the recording. When this setting is turned off, the contour areas use standard

map colors.

Green indicates good depth and GPS position, and a speed under 16km/h (10mph). Yellow indicates good

depth and GPS position, and a speed between 16 and 32km/h (10 and 20mph). Red indicates poor depth or

GPS position, and a speed above 32km/h (20mph).

Depth Shading: Specifies the minimum and maximum depths of a depth range and a color for that depth range.

Navigation with a Chartplotter

WARNING

All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance

or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and

conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,

personal injury, or death.

The Auto Guidance feature is based on electronic chart information. That data does not ensure obstacle and

bottom clearance. Carefully compare the course to all visual sightings, and avoid any land, shallow water, or

other obstacles that may be in your path.

When using Go To, a direct course and a corrected course may pass over land or shallow water. Use visual

sightings, and steer to avoid land, shallow water, and other dangerous objects.

CAUTION

If your vessel has an autopilot system, a dedicated autopilot control display must be installed at each steering

helm in order to disable the autopilot system.

NOTE: Some chart views are available with premium charts, in some areas.

To navigate, you must choose a destination, set a course or create a route, and follow the course or route. You

can follow the course or the route on the Navigation chart, Fishing chart, Perspective 3D chart view, or Mariner’s

Eye 3D chart view.

You can set and follow a course to a destination using one of three methods: Go To, Route To, or Auto

Guidance.

Go To: Takes you directly to the destination. This is the standard option for navigating to a destination. The

chartplotter creates a straight-line course or navigation line to the destination. The path may run over land

and other obstacles.

Route To: Creates a route from your location to a destination, allowing you to add turns along the way. This

option provides a straight-line course to the destination, but allows you to add turns into the route to avoid

land and other obstacles.

Auto Guidance: Uses the specified information about your vessel and chart data to determine the best path

to your destination. This option is available only when using a compatible premium chart in a compatible

chartplotter. It provides a turn-by-turn navigation path to the destination, avoiding land and other obstacles

(Auto Guidance, page56).

48 Navigation with a Chartplotter

When you are using a compatible autopilot connected to the chartplotter using NMEA 2000, the autopilot

follows the Auto Guidance route.

NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.

The color of the route line changes depending upon several factors (Route Color Coding, page49).

Basic Navigation Questions

Question Answer

How do I make the chartplotter point me in the

direction in which I want to go (bearing)?

Navigate using Go To (Setting and Following a Direct Course

Using Go To, page50).

How do I make the device guide me along

a straight line (minimizing cross track) to a

location using the shortest distance from the

present location?

Build a single-leg route and navigate it using Route To

(Creating and Navigating a Route From Your Present Location,

page54).

How do I make the device guide me to a

location while avoiding charted obstacles?

Build a multi-leg route and navigate it using Route To

(Creating and Navigating a Route From Your Present Location,

page54).

How do I make the device steer my automatic

pilot?

Navigate using Route To (Creating and Navigating a Route

From Your Present Location, page54).

Can the device create a path for me?

If you have premium maps that support Auto Guidance and

are in an area covered by Auto Guidance, navigate using

Auto Guidance (Setting and Following an Auto Guidance Path,

page56).

How do I change the Auto Guidance settings

for my boat?

See Auto Guidance Path Configurations, page58.

Route Color Coding

WARNING

All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance

or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and

conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,

personal injury, or death.

The Auto Guidance feature is based on electronic chart information. That data does not ensure obstacle and

bottom clearance. Carefully compare the course to all visual sightings, and avoid any land, shallow water, or

other obstacles that may be in your path.

When using Go To, a direct course and a corrected course may pass over land or shallow water. Use visual

sightings, and steer to avoid land, shallow water, and other dangerous objects.

As you navigate, the color of the route might change to indicate when you should take caution.

Magenta: Default route/course line.

Thin purple: Dynamically corrected course, indicating you are off course.

Orange: Caution! This segment of the route may be near the thresholds of the Auto Guidance depth and height

settings. For example, the route segment is orange when the route crosses under a bridge or is in potentially

shallow waters. Garmin Navionics+

™

and Garmin Navionics Vision+ charts only.

Red striped: Warning! This segment of the route might be unsafe, based on the Auto Guidance depth and height

settings. For example, the roue segment is red striped when the route crosses under a very low bridge or is in

shallow waters. This line is red striped in Garmin Navionics+ and Garmin Navionics Vision+ charts only; it is

magenta and gray striped in previous versions of the charts.

Gray: Cannot calculate this segment of the route due to land or other obstacles, or there is no chart coverage

area in that location.

Navigation with a Chartplotter 49

Destinations

You can select destinations using various charts and 3D chart views or using the lists.

Searching for a Destination by Name

You can search for saved waypoints, saved routes, saved tracks, and marine services destinations by name.

1 Select Info > Services > Search by Name.

2 Enter at least a portion of the name of your destination.

3 If necessary, select Done.

The 50 nearest destinations that contain your search criteria appear.

4 Select the destination.

Selecting a Destination Using the Navigation Chart

From the Navigation chart, select a destination.

Searching for a Marine Services Destination

NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.

The chartplotter contains information for thousands of destinations offering marine services.

1 Select Info > Services.

2 Select Offshore Services or Inland Services.

3 If necessary, select the marine service category.

The chartplotter shows a list of the nearest locations and the distance and bearing to each.

4 Select a destination to view more information about the destination, if available.

You can select or to scroll through the list of nearest designations.

Setting and Following a Direct Course Using Go To

WARNING

When using Go To, a direct course and a corrected course may pass over land or shallow water. Use visual

sightings, and steer to avoid land, shallow water, and other dangerous objects.

You can set and follow a direct course from your current location to a selected destination.

1 Select a destination (Destinations, page50).

2 Select Navigate To > Go To.

A magenta line appears. In the center of the magenta line is a thinner purple line that represents the

corrected course from your current location to the destination. The corrected course is dynamic, and it

moves with your boat when you are off course.

3 Follow the magenta line, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles.

4 If you are off course, follow the purple line (corrected course) to go to your destination, or steer back to the

magenta line (direct course).

You can also use the orange course-to-steer arrow, which shows a proposed turning radius to return your

boat to the course.

WARNING

Review the path for obstacles before negotiating the turn. If the path is unsafe, reduce your boat speed and

determine a safe path back to the course.

50 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Stopping Navigation

While navigating, from an applicable chart, select an option:

• Select Options > Stop Navigation.

• When navigating with Auto Guidance, select Options > Navigation Options > Stop Navigation.

• Select .

Waypoints

Waypoints are locations you record and store in the device. Waypoints can mark where you are, where you are

going, or where you have been. You can add details about the location, such as name, elevation, and depth.

Marking Your Present Location as a Waypoint

From any screen, select Mark.

Creating a Waypoint at a Different Location

1 From a chart, select Info > User Data > Waypoints > New Waypoint.

2 Select an option:

• To create the waypoint by entering position coordinates, select Enter Coordinates, and enter the

coordinates.

• To create the waypoint using a chart, select Use Chart, select the location, and select Select.

• To create the waypoint using a range (distance) and bearing, select Enter Range/Bearing, and enter the

information.

Marking a Man Overboard (MOB) Location

1 Hold SOS for one second.

2 If necessary, select Yes to navigate to the man overboard location.

If you selected Yes, the chartplotter sets a direct course back to the location.

Projecting a Waypoint

You can create a new waypoint by projecting the distance and bearing from a different location. This can be

helpful when creating sail racing start and finish lines.

1 Select Info > User Data > Waypoints > New Waypoint > Enter Range/Bearing.

2 If necessary, select a reference point on the chart.

3 Select Enter Range/Bearing.

4 Enter the distance, and select Done.

5 Enter the bearing, and select Done.

6 Select Create Waypoint.

Viewing a List of all Waypoints

Select an option:

• Select Info > User Data > Waypoints.

• From a chart or 3D chart view, select Options > Waypoints.

Navigation with a Chartplotter 51

Editing a Saved Waypoint

1 Select Info > User Data > Waypoints.

2 Select a waypoint.

3 Select Review > Edit.

4 Select an option:

• To add a name, select Name, and enter a name.

• To change the symbol, select Symbol.

• To move the position of the waypoint, select Position.

• To change the depth, select Depth.

• To change the water temperature, select Water Temp..

• To change the comment, select Comment.

Moving a Saved Waypoint

1 Select Info > User Data > Waypoints.

2 Select a waypoint.

3 Select Review > Edit > Position.

4 Indicate a new location for the waypoint:

• To move the waypoint using coordinates, select Enter Coordinates, enter the new coordinates, and select

Done or Cancel.

• To move the waypoint while using the chart, select Use Chart, select a new location on the chart, and

select Move Waypoint.

• To move the waypoint using the vessel's current position, select Use Current Position.

• To move the waypoint using a range (distance) and bearing, select Enter Range/Bearing, enter the

information, and select Done.

52 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Browsing for and Navigating to a Saved Waypoint

WARNING

All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance

or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and

conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,

personal injury, or death.

The Auto Guidance feature is based on electronic chart information. That data does not ensure obstacle and

bottom clearance. Carefully compare the course to all visual sightings, and avoid any land, shallow water, or

other obstacles that may be in your path.

When using Go To, a direct course and a corrected course may pass over land or shallow water. Use visual

sightings, and steer to avoid land, shallow water, and other dangerous objects.

NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.

Before you can navigate to a waypoint, you must create a waypoint.

1 Select Info > User Data > Waypoints.

2 Select a waypoint.

3 Select Navigate To.

4 Select an option:

• To navigate directly to the location, select Go To.

• To create a route to the location, including turns, select Route To.

• To use Auto Guidance, select Auto Guidance.

5 Review the course indicated by the magenta line.

NOTE: When using Auto Guidance, a gray segment within any part of the magenta line indicates that Auto

Guidance cannot calculate part of the Auto Guidance line. This is due to the settings for minimum safe water

depth and minimum safe obstacle height.

6 Follow the magenta line, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles.

Deleting a Waypoint or an MOB

1 Select Info > User Data > Waypoints.

2 Select a waypoint or an MOB.

3 Select Review > Delete.

Deleting All Waypoints

Select Info > User Data > Delete User Data > Waypoints > All.

Routes

A route is a path from one location to one or more destinations.

Navigation with a Chartplotter 53

Creating and Navigating a Route From Your Present Location

You can create and immediately navigate a route on the Navigation chart or the Fishing chart. This method does

not save the route.

1 From the Navigation chart or Fishing chart, select a destination.

2 Select Navigate To > Route To.

3 Select the location of the last turn before the destination.

4 Select Add Turn.

5 If necessary, repeat to add turns, working backward from the destination to the present location of your

vessel.

The last turn you add should be the first turn you make, starting from your present location. It should be the

turn closest to your vessel.

6 Select Done.

7 Review the course indicated by the magenta line.

8 Follow the magenta line, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles.

Creating and Saving a Route

You can add up to 250 turns to one route.

1 Select Info > User Data > Routes > New > Route Using Chart.

2 Select the starting location of the route.

The starting point can be your present location or another location.

3 Select Add Turn.

4 Select the location of the next turn on the chart.

5 Select Add Turn.

6 If necessary, repeat steps 4 and 5 to add more turns.

7 Select Done.

Viewing a List of Routes and Auto Guidance Paths

1 Select Info > User Data > Routes.

2 If necessary, select Filter to see routes only or Auto Guidance paths only.

3 Select Sort to sort the list of available routes by range, length, or name.

Editing a Saved Route

You can change the name of a route or change the turns the route contains.

1 Select Info > User Data > Routes.

2 Select a route.

3 Select Review > Edit Route.

4 Select an option:

• To change the name, select Name, and enter the name.

• To edit a turn from a list, select Edit Turns > Use Turn List, and select a turn from the list.

• To select a turn using the chart, select Edit Turns > Use Chart, and select a location on the chart.

Modifying a turn that uses a saved waypoint does not move that waypoint, it relocates the turn in the route.

Moving the location of a waypoint used in a route does not move the turn in the route.

54 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Finding and Navigating a Saved Route

Before you can browse a list of routes and navigate to one of them, you must create and save at least one route

(Creating and Saving a Route, page54).

1 Select Info > User Data > Routes.

2 Select a route.

3 Select Navigate To.

4 Select an option:

• To navigate the route from the starting point used when the route was created, select Forward.

• To navigate the route from the destination point used when the route was created, select Backward.

• To navigate parallel to the route, select Offset (Browsing for and Navigating Parallel to a Saved Route,

page55).

• To navigate a route from the route's first waypoint, select From Start.

A magenta line appears. In the center of the magenta line is a thinner purple line that represents the

corrected course from your present location to the destination. The corrected course is dynamic, and it

moves with your boat when you are off course.

5 Review the course indicated by the magenta line.

6 Follow the magenta line along each leg in the route, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other

obstacles.

7 If you are off course, follow the purple line (corrected course) to go to your destination, or steer back to the

magenta line (direct course).

Browsing for and Navigating Parallel to a Saved Route

Before you can browse a list of routes and navigate to one of them, you must create and save at least one route

(Creating and Saving a Route, page54).

1 Select Info > User Data > Routes.

NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.

2 Select a route.

3 Select Navigate To.

4 Select Offset to navigate parallel to the route.

5 Select Offset to enter the distance to offset from the route.

6 Indicate how to navigate the route:

• To navigate the route from the starting point used when the route was created, to the left of the original

route, select Forward - Port.

• To navigate the route from the starting point used when the route was created, to the right of the original

route, select Forward - Starboard.

• To navigate the route from the destination point used when the route was created, to the left of the

original route, select Backward - Port.

• To navigate the route from the destination point used when the route was created, to the right of the

original route, select Backward - Starboard.

7 If necessary, select Done.

A magenta line appears. In the center of the magenta line is a thinner purple line that represents the

corrected course from your present location to the destination. The corrected course is dynamic, and it

moves with your boat when you are off course.

8 Review the course indicated by the magenta line.

9 Follow the magenta line along each leg in the route, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other

obstacles.

10 If you are off course, follow the purple line (corrected course) to go to your destination, or steer back to the

magenta line (direct course).

Navigation with a Chartplotter 55

Initiating a Search Pattern

You can initiate a search pattern to search an area. Different patterns are better suited for different search

situations.

1 Select Info > User Data > Routes > New > Route Using SAR Pattern.

2 Select a pattern:

• Select Sector Search when the location of the object is fairly known, the search area is small, and an

intensive search is needed.

• Select Expanding Square when the location of the object is somewhat doubtful, the search area is small,

and an intensive search is needed.

• Select Creeping/Parallel Line when the location of the object is approximate, the search area is small, and

a consistent search is needed.

3 Enter the search parameters.

4 Select Done.

5 If necessary, select Engage.

Deleting a Saved Route

1 Select Info > User Data > Routes.

2 Select a route.

3 Select Review > Delete.

Deleting All Saved Routes

Select Info > User Data > Delete User Data > Routes.

Auto Guidance

WARNING

The Auto Guidance feature is based on electronic chart information. That data does not ensure obstacle and

bottom clearance. Carefully compare the course to all visual sightings, and avoid any land, shallow water, or

other obstacles that may be in your path.

All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance

or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and

conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,

personal injury, or death.

NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.

You can use Auto Guidance to plot the best path to your destination. Auto Guidance uses your chartplotter to

scan chart data, such as water depth and known obstacles, to calculate a suggested path. You can adjust the

path during navigation.

Setting and Following an Auto Guidance Path

1 Select a destination (Destinations, page50).

2 Select Navigate To > Auto Guidance.

3 Review the path, indicated by the magenta line.

4 Select Start Navigation.

5 Follow the magenta line, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles (Route Color Coding,

page49).

NOTE: When using Auto Guidance, a gray segment within any part of the magenta line indicates that Auto

Guidance cannot calculate part of the Auto Guidance line. This is due to the settings for minimum safe water

depth and minimum safe obstacle height.

56 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Creating and Saving an Auto Guidance Path

1 Select Info > User Data > Routes > New > Auto Guidance.

2 Select a starting point, and select Next.

3 Select a destination, and select Next.

4 Select an option:

• To view a hazard and adjust the path near a hazard, select Hazard Review.

• To adjust the path, select Adjust Path, and follow the on-screen instructions.

• To delete the path, select Cancel Auto Guidance.

• To save the path, select Done.

Adjusting a Saved Auto Guidance Path

1 Select Info > User Data > Routes.

2 Select a path, and select Review > Edit > Adjust Path.

TIP: When navigating an Auto Guidance path, select the path on the navigation chart, and select Adjust Path.

3 Select a location on the path.

4 Drag the point to a new location.

5 If necessary, select a point, and select Remove.

6 Select Done.

Canceling an Auto Guidance Calculation in Progress

From the Navigation chart, select Options > Cancel.

TIP: You can select Back to quickly cancel the calculation.

Setting a Timed Arrival

You can use this feature on a route or an Auto Guidance path to get feedback about when you should arrive at a

selected point. This allows you to time your arrival at a location, such as a bridge opening or a race starting line.

1 From the Navigation chart, select Options.

2 Select Navigation Options > Timed Arrival.

TIP: You can quickly open the Timed Arrival menu by selecting a point on the path or route.

Navigation with a Chartplotter 57

Auto Guidance Path Configurations

CAUTION

The Preferred Depth and Vertical Clearance settings influence how the chartplotter calculates an Auto Guidance

path. If a section of an Auto Guidance path is shallower than the Preferred Depth or lower than the Vertical

Clearance settings, the section of the Auto Guidance path appears as a solid orange line or a red striped line

in Garmin Navionics+ and Garmin Navionics Vision+ charts and appears as a magenta and gray striped line in

previous versions. When your boat enters one of those areas, a warning message appears (Route Color Coding,

page49).

NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.

NOTE: Not all settings apply to all maps.

You can set the parameters the chartplotter uses when calculating an Auto Guidance path.

Select Settings > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance.

Preferred Depth: Sets the minimum water depth, based on chart depth data, that your boat can safely travel

over.

NOTE: The minimum water depth for the premium charts (made before 2016) is 3 feet. If you enter a value of

less than 3 feet, the charts only use depths of 3 feet for Auto Guidance path calculations.

Vertical Clearance: Sets the minimum height of a bridge or obstacle, based on chart data, that your boat can

safely travel under.

Shoreline Distance: Sets how close to the shore you want the Auto Guidance path to be placed. The path

may move if you change this setting while navigating. The available values for this setting are relative, not

absolute. To ensure that path is placed the appropriate distance from shore, you can assess the placement

of the path using one or more familiar destinations that require navigation through a narrow waterway

(Adjusting the Distance from Shore, page59).

58 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Adjusting the Distance from Shore

The Shoreline Distance setting indicates how close to the shore you want the Auto Guidance line to be placed.

The Auto Guidance line may move if you change this setting while navigating. The available values for the

Shoreline Distance setting are relative, not absolute. To ensure the Auto Guidance line is placed the appropriate

distance from shore, you can assess the placement of the Auto Guidance line using one or more familiar

destinations that require navigation through a narrow waterway.

1 Dock your vessel or drop the anchor.

2 Select Settings > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance > Shoreline Distance > Normal.

3 Select a destination that you have navigated to previously.

4 Select Navigate To > Auto Guidance.

5 Review the placement of the Auto Guidance line, and determine whether the line safely avoids known

obstacles and the turns enable efficient travel.

6 Select an option:

• If the placement of the line is satisfactory, select Options > Navigation Options > Stop Navigation, and

proceed to step 10.

• If the line is too close to known obstacles, select Settings > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance >

Shoreline Distance > Far.

• If the turns in the line are too wide, select Settings > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance >

Shoreline Distance > Near.

7 If you selected Near or Far in step 6, review the placement of the Auto Guidance line, and determine whether

the line safely avoids known obstacles and the turns enable efficient travel.

Auto Guidance maintains a wide clearance from obstacles in open water, even if you set the Shoreline

Distance setting to Near or Nearest. As a result, the chartplotter may not reposition the Auto Guidance line,

unless the destination selected requires navigation through a narrow waterway.

8 Select an option:

• If the placement of the line is satisfactory, select Options > Navigation Options > Stop Navigation, and

proceed to step 10.

• If the line is too close to known obstacles, select Settings > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance >

Shoreline Distance > Farthest.

• If the turns in the line are too wide, select Settings > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance >

Shoreline Distance > Nearest.

9 If you selected Nearest or Farthest in step 8, review the placement of the Auto Guidance line, and determine

whether the line safely avoids known obstacles and the turns enable efficient travel.

The Auto Guidance path maintains a wide clearance from obstacles in open water, even if you set the

Shoreline Distance setting to Near or Nearest. As a result, the chartplotter may not reposition the Auto

Guidance line, unless the destination selected requires navigation through a narrow waterway.

10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 at least once more, using a different destination each time, until you are familiar

with the functionality of the Shoreline Distance setting.

Tracks

A track is a recording of the path of your boat. The track currently being recorded is called the active track, and it

can be saved. You can show tracks in each chart or 3D chart view.

Showing Tracks

1 From a chart, select Options > Layers > User Data > Tracks.

2 Select the tracks to display.

A trailing line on the chart indicates your track.

Navigation with a Chartplotter 59

Setting the Color of the Active Track

1 Select Info > User Data > Tracks > Active Track Options > Track Color.

2 Select a track color.

Saving the Active Track

The track currently being recorded is called the active track.

1 Select Info > User Data > Tracks > Save Active Track.

2 Select an option:

• Select the time the active track began.

• Select Entire Log.

3 Select Save.

Viewing a List of Saved Tracks

Select Info > User Data > Tracks > Saved Tracks.

Editing a Saved Track

1 Select Info > User Data > Tracks > Saved Tracks.

2 Select a track.

3 Select Review > Edit Track.

4 Select an option:

• Select Name, and enter the new name.

• Select Track Color, and select a color.

• Select Save as Route to save the track as a route.

• Select Save as Boundary to save the track as a boundary.

Saving a Track as a Route

1 Select Info > User Data > Tracks > Saved Tracks.

2 Select a track.

3 Select Review > Edit Track > Save as Route.

Browsing for and Navigating a Recorded Track

Before you can browse a list of tracks and navigate to them, you must record and save at least one track

(Tracks, page59).

1 Select Info > User Data > Tracks > Saved Tracks.

2 Select a track.

3 Select Follow Track.

4 Select an option:

• To navigate the track from the starting point used when the track was created, select Forward.

• To navigate the track from the destination point used when the track was created, select Backward.

5 Review the course indicated by the colored line.

6 Follow the line along each leg in the route, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles.

Deleting a Saved Track

1 Select Info > User Data > Tracks > Saved Tracks.

2 Select a track.

3 Select Review > Delete.

60 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Deleting All Saved Tracks

Select Info > User Data > Delete User Data > Saved Tracks.

Retracing the Active Track

The track currently being recorded is called the active track.

1 Select Info > User Data > Tracks > Follow Active Track.

2 Select an option:

• Select the time the active track began.

• Select Entire Log.

3 Review the course indicated by the colored line.

4 Follow the colored line, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles.

Clearing the Active Track

Select Info > User Data > Tracks > Clear Active Track.

The track memory is cleared, and the active track continues to be recorded.

Managing the Track Log Memory During Recording

1 Select Info > User Data > Tracks > Active Track Options.

2 Select Record Mode.

3 Select an option:

• To record a track log until the track memory is full, select Fill.

• To continuously record a track log, replacing the oldest track data with new data, select Wrap.

Configuring the Recording Interval of the Track Log

You can indicate the frequency at which the track plot is recorded. Recording more frequent plots is more

accurate but fills the track log faster. The resolution interval is recommended for the most efficient use of

memory.

1 Select Info > User Data > Tracks > Active Track Options > Interval.

2 Select an option:

• To record the track based on a distance between points, select Interval > Distance > Change, and enter

the distance.

• To record the track based on a time interval, select Interval > Time > Change, and enter the time interval.

• To record the track plot based on a variance from your course, select Interval > Resolution > Change,

and enter the maximum error allowed from the true course before recording a track point. This is the

recommended recording option.

Boundaries

CAUTION

The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page164). Failure

to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.

Boundaries allow you to avoid or remain in designated areas in a body of water. You can set an alarm to alert

you when you enter or exit a boundary.

You can create boundary areas, lines, and circles using the map. You can also convert saved tracks and routes

into boundary lines. You can create a boundary area using waypoints by creating a route from the waypoints,

and converting the route into a boundary line.

You can select a boundary to act as the active boundary. You can add the active boundary data to the data

fields on the chart.

Navigation with a Chartplotter 61

Creating a Boundary

1 Select Info > User Data > Boundaries > New.

2 Select a boundary shape.

3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Converting a Route to a Boundary

1 Select Info > User Data > Routes.

2 Select a route.

3 Select Review > Edit Route > Save as Boundary.

Converting a Track to a Boundary

1 Select Info > User Data > Tracks > Saved Tracks.

2 Select a track.

3 Select Review > Edit Track > Save as Boundary.

Editing a Boundary

1 Select Info > User Data > Boundaries.

2 Select a boundary.

3 Select Review.

4 Select an option:

• To edit the appearance of the boundary on the chart, select Display Options.

• To change the boundary lines or name, select Edit Boundary.

• To edit the boundary alarm, select Alarm.

Linking a Boundary to a SmartMode Layout

You can link a boundary to a SmartMode layout to automatically open the layout when entering or exiting the

boundary. For example, you can set a boundary around your marina, and automatically open the Docking layout

when you approach the marina.

1 Select Info > User Data > Boundaries.

2 Select a boundary.

3 Select Review > Link SmartMode™ > SmartMode™.

4 Select Entering, and select a layout.

5 Select Exiting, and select a layout.

Setting a Boundary Alarm

Boundary alarms alert you when you are within a specified distance of a set boundary. This can be helpful when

attempting to avoid certain areas or when you should be very alert in certain areas, such as shipping lanes.

1 Select Info > User Data > Boundaries.

2 Select a boundary.

3 Select Review > Alarm.

4 Select an option:

• To set an alarm for when your boat is a specified distance from the boundary, select Warning Dist., enter a

distance, and select Done.

• To set an alarm for when you enter or exit an area boundary or a circle boundary, select Area to show

Entering or Exiting.

Disabling all Boundary Alarms

Select Info > User Data > Boundaries > Alarms.

62 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Deleting a Boundary

1 Select Info > User Data > Boundaries.

2 Select a boundary.

3 Select Review > Edit Boundary > Delete.

Deleting All Saved Waypoints, Tracks, Routes, and Boundaries

Select Info > User Data > Delete User Data > Delete All User Data > OK.

Sailing Features

Setting the Vessel Type for Sailing Features

You must select a sailing vessel type to use the sailing features.

1 Select Settings > My Vessel > Vessel Type.

2 Select Sailboat or Sailing Catamaran.

Sail Racing

You can use the device to increase the likelihood that your boat will cross the start line of a race exactly when

the race begins. When you synchronize the race timer with the official race countdown timer, you are alerted

at one-minute intervals as the race start approaches. When you combine the race timer with the virtual start

line, the device measures your speed, bearing, and remaining time on the countdown timer. The device uses this

data to indicate whether your boat will cross the start line before, after, or at the correct time to start the race.

Starting Line Guidance

Sailing start line guidance is a visual representation of the information you need to cross the start line at the

optimal time and speed.

After you set the starboard and port start line pins, and the target speed and time, and after you start the race

timer, a predictor line appears. The predictor line extends from your current location toward the start line and

the laylines that extend from each pin.

The end point and color of the predictor line indicate where the boat will be when the timer expires, based on

your current boat speed.

When the end point is before the start line, the line is white. This indicates the boat must increase speed to

reach the start line on time.

When the end point is past the start line, the line is red. This indicates the boat must reduce speed to avoid a

penalty for reaching the start line before the timer expires.

When the end point is on the start line, the line is white. This indicates the boat is moving at an optimal speed to

reach the start line when the timer expires.

By default, the start line guidance window and the race timer window appear in the Sail Racing combination

screen.

Setting the Starting Line

The start line guidance window is added to the Sail Racing combination screen by default.

1 From the Sail Racing combination screen, select Options > Start Line Guidance > Start Line.

2 Select an option:

• To mark the port and starboard starting line marks as you sail past them, select Ping Marks.

• To mark the port and starboard starting line marks by entering their coordinates, select Enter Coordinates.

• To switch the position of the port and starboard marks after you have set them, select Swap Port &

Starbd..

Sailing Features 63

Using the Starting Line Guidance

You can use the starting line guidance feature to help get you cross the start line, at the optimal speed during a

sailing race.

1 Mark the starting line (Setting the Starting Line, page63).

2 From the Sail Racing combination screen, select Options > Start Line Guidance > Target Speed, and select

your target speed when crossing the starting line.

3 Select Target Time, and select the target time to cross the starting line.

4 Select Back.

5 Start the racing timer (Starting the Race Timer, page64).

Starting the Race Timer

The race timer is added to the Sail Racing combination screen by default.

1 From the Sail Racing combination screen, select Start.

NOTE: You can also access this from the Sailing SmartMode screen and the navigation chart.

2 When necessary, select Sync to synchronize with the official race timer.

Stopping the Race Timer

From the Sail Racing combination screen, select Stop.

Setting the Distance between the Bow and the GPS Antenna

You can enter the distance between the bow of your boat and the location of your GPS antenna. This helps

ensure the bow of your boat crosses the starting line at the precise start time.

1 From the Sail Racing combination screen, select Options > Start Line Guidance > Start Line > GPS Bow Ofst..

2 Enter the distance.

3 Select Done.

64 Sailing Features

Laylines Settings

To use the laylines features, you must connect a wind sensor to the chartplotter.

When in sailing mode (Setting the Vessel Type, page13), you can display laylines on the navigation chart.

Laylines can be very helpful when racing.

From the Navigation chart, select Options > Layers > My Vessel > Laylines > Setup.

Sailing Ang.: Allows you to select how the device calculates laylines. The Actual option calculates the laylines

using the measured wind angle from the wind sensor. The Manual option calculates the laylines using

manually entered windward and leeward angles. The Polar Table option calculates the laylines based on the

imported polar table data (Importing a Polar Table Manually, page65).

Windward Ang.: Allows you to set a layline based on the windward sailing angle.

Leeward Ang.: Allows you to set a layline based on the leeward sailing angle.

Tide Correction: Corrects the laylines based on the tide.

Layline Filter: Filters the layline data based on the time interval entered. For a smoother layline that filters out

some of the changes in the boat's heading or true wind angle, enter a higher number. For laylines that display

a higher sensitivity to changes in the boat's heading or true wind angle, enter a lower number.

Polar Tables

WARNING

This feature allows you to load and use data from a third party. Garmin makes no representations about the

accuracy, reliability, completeness or timeliness of the data generated by third parties. Any use or reliance on

data generated by third parties is at your own risk.

You can use polar table data with your chartplotter. You can assign polar data types in data fields, and you can

use polar data to calculate optimal laylines and starting line guidance.

Importing a Polar Table Manually

If you save the polar table file as polar.plr and place it in the Garmin/polars/ folder on the memory card, the

chartplotter imports the data automatically after you insert the memory card. If it does not import the data

automatically, or if you want to load a different set of data, you can initiate the import manually.

1 Save the polar table file (polar.plr) to the Garmin/polars/ folder on the memory card.

2 Insert the memory card containing the polar data file into the chartplotter (Memory Cards, page9).

3 Select Settings > My Vessel > Polar Table > Import from Card.

4 If necessary, select the card slot and the polar table file.

Sailing Features 65

Showing Polar Data in Data Fields

Before you can view polar data, you must import a polar table from a memory card (Importing a Polar Table

Manually, page65).

1 Open the screen to which you want to add polar data.

2 Select Options > Edit Overlays.

3 Select the data field to change.

4 Select Sailing.

5 Select the polar data to display in the data field.

• To show the boat speed from the polar table at the current true wind speed and angle, select Polar Speed.

• To show the optimal boat speed at the target wind angle, select Target Speed.

• To show the optimal wind angle at the current true wind speed, select Target True Wind Angle.

• To show Target TWA converted to apparent using target speed, select Target App. Wind Angle.

• To show the difference between the current boat speed and the optimal boat speed shown as speed,

select Δ Polar Speed.

• To show the difference between the current boat speed and the optimal boat speed as a percentage,

select Δ Polar Speed Percent.

• To show the difference between the current boat speed and the target boat speed shown as speed, select

Δ Target Speed.

• To show the difference between the current boat speed and the target boat speed shown as a percentage,

select Δ Target Speed Percent.

• To show the difference between the true wind angle and target true wind angle, select Δ Target True Wind

Angle.

• To show the difference between the apparent wind angle and target apparent wind angle and the true

wind angle, select Δ Target App. Wind Angle.

TIP: You can also use the polar table data when calculating laylines and starting line guidance.

66 Sailing Features

Setting the Keel Offset

You can enter a keel offset to compensate the water depth reading for the transducer installation location. This

allows you to view the depth of the water below the keel or the true depth of the water, depending on your

needs.

If you want to know the water depth below the keel or the lowest point of your boat and the transducer is

installed at the water line or anywhere above the end of the keel, measure the distance from the transducer

location to the keel of the boat.

If you want to know the true water depth and the transducer is installed below the water line, measure the

distance from the bottom of the transducer up to the water line.

NOTE: This option is only available when you have valid depth data.

1 Measure the distance:

• If the transducer is installed at the water line or anywhere above the end of the keel, measure the

distance from the transducer location to the keel of the boat. Enter this value as a positive number.

• If the transducer is installed at the bottom of the keel and you want to know the true depth of the

water, measure the distance from the transducer to the water line. Enter this value in as a negative

number.

2 Complete an action:

• If the transducer is connected to the chartplotter or a sonar module, select Settings > My Vessel > Depth

and Anchoring > Keel Offset.

• If the transducer is connected to the NMEA 2000 network, select Settings > Communications > NMEA

2000 Setup > Device List, select the transducer, and select Review > Keel Offset.

3 Select if the transducer is installed at the water line, or select if the transducer is installed at the

bottom of the keel.

4 Enter the distance measured in step 1.

Sailboat Autopilot Operation

CAUTION

When engaged, the autopilot controls only the rudder. You and your crew remain responsible for the sails while

the autopilot is engaged.

In addition to heading hold, you can use the autopilot to maintain a wind hold. You can also use the autopilot to

control the rudder while tacking and gybing.

Sailing Features 67

Wind Hold

You can set the autopilot to maintain a specific bearing relative to the current wind angle. Your device must be

connected to a NMEA 2000 or NMEA 0183 compatible wind sensor to perform a wind hold or a wind-based tack

or gybe.

Changing the Wind Hold Type

With the wind hold engaged, select Options > Wind Hold Type.

The wind hold type changes from Apparent to True, or vice versa.

Engaging Wind Hold

Before you can engage wind hold, you must connect a NMEA 2000 wind sensor to the autopilot.

Although a NMEA 2000 wind sensor is preferred, you can connect a NMEA 0183 wind sensor to the autopilot to

use wind hold.

1 When the autopilot is in standby mode, select Options.

2 Select an option:

• To engage an apparent wind hold, select Engage App. Wind Hold.

• To engage a true wind hold, select Engage True Wind Hold.

TIP: You can quickly engage the last type of wind hold used by selecting Wind Hold from standby mode.

Engaging Wind Hold from Heading Hold

Before you can engage wind hold, you must connect a NMEA 2000 wind sensor to the autopilot.

Although a NMEA 2000 wind sensor is preferred, you can connect a NMEA 0183 wind sensor to the autopilot to

use wind hold.

1 With heading hold engaged, select Options.

2 Select an option:

• To change from heading hold to apparent wind hold, select Engage App. Wind Hold.

• To change from heading hold to true wind hold, select Engage True Wind Hold.

Adjusting the Wind Hold Angle

You can adjust the wind hold angle on the autopilot when wind hold is engaged.

• To adjust the wind hold angle in increments of 1°, select <1° or 1°>.

NOTE: Holding <1° or 1°> for a few seconds automatically transitions the autopilot from Wind Hold to

Heading Hold and initiates rudder steering.

• To adjust the wind hold angle in increments of 10°, select <<10° or 10°>>.

NOTE: You can adjust the settings so that the step turn size is smaller or larger than 10°Adjusting the Step

Steering Increment, page108.

Tack and Gybe

You can set the autopilot to perform a tack or gybe while heading hold or wind hold is engaged.

Tacking and Gybing from Heading Hold

1 Engage a heading hold (Engaging the Autopilot, page109).

2 Select Options.

3 Select an option.

The autopilot steers your boat through a tack or gybe.

68 Sailing Features

Tacking and Gybing from Wind Hold

Before you can engage wind hold, you must have a wind sensor installed.

1 Engage wind hold (Engaging Wind Hold, page68).

2 Select Options.

3 Select an option.

The autopilot steers your boat through a tack or gybe, and information about the progress of the tack or gybe

appears on the screen.

Setting a Tack Delay

The tack delay allows you to delay steering a tack after you initiate the maneuver.

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Sailing Setup > Tack Delay.

2 Select the length of the delay.

3 If necessary, select Done.

Enabling the Gybe Inhibitor

NOTE: The gybe inhibitor does not prevent you from manually performing a gybe using the helm or step

steering.

The gybe inhibitor prevents the autopilot from performing a gybe.

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Sailing Setup > Gybe Inhibitor.

2 Select Enabled.

Heading Line and Angle Markers

The heading line is an extension drawn on the map from the bow of the boat in the direction of travel. Angle

markers indicate relative position from the heading or course over ground, which are helpful for casting or

finding reference points.

Setting the Heading Line and Angle Markers

The heading line is an extension drawn on the map from the bow of the boat in the direction of travel. Angle

markers indicate relative position from the heading or course over ground, which are helpful for casting or

finding reference points.

You can show the heading line and the course over ground (COG) line on the chart.

COG is your direction of movement. Heading is the direction the bow of the boat is pointed, when a heading

sensor is connected.

1 From a chart, select Options > Layers > My Vessel > Heading Line > Angle Markers.

2 If necessary, select Source, and select an option:

• To automatically use the available source, select Auto.

• To use the GPS antenna heading for COG, select GPS Heading (COG).

• To use data from a connected heading sensor, select Heading.

• To use data from both a connected heading sensor and the GPS antenna, select COG and Heading.

This displays both the heading line and the COG line on the chart.

3 Select Display, and select an option:

• Select Distance > Distance, and enter the length of the line shown on the chart.

• Select Time > Time, and enter the time used to calculate the distance your boat will travel in the specified

time at your present speed.

Sailing Features 69

Sonar Fishfinder

When properly connected to a compatible transducer, your chartplotter can be used as a fishfinder.

For more information about which transducer is best for your needs, go to garmin.com/transducers.

Different sonar views can help you view the fish in the area. The sonar views available vary depending on

the type of transducer and sounder module connected to the chartplotter. For example, you can view certain

Panoptix

™

sonar screens only if you have a compatible Panoptix transducer connected.

There are four basic styles of sonar views available: a full-screen view, a split-screen view that combines two

or more views, a split-zoom view, and a split-frequency view that displays two different frequencies. You can

customize the settings for each view in the screen. For example, if you are viewing the split-frequency view, you

can separately adjust the gain for each frequency.

If you do not see an arrangement of sonar views to suit your needs, you can create a custom combination

screen (Creating a New Combination Page, page15). You can also add sonar views to SmartMode layouts

(Adding a SmartMode Layout, page16).

Stopping the Transmission of Sonar Signals

• To disable the active sonar, from the sonar screen, select Options > Transmit.

• To disable all sonar transmissions, press , and select Disable All Sonar Trans..

Traditional Sonar View

There are several full-screen views available, depending on the transducer that is connected.

The full-screen Traditional sonar view shows a large image of the sonar readings from a transducer. The range

scale along the right side of the screen shows the depth of detected objects as the screen scrolls from the right

to the left.

Depth information

Suspended targets or fish

Bottom of the body of water

Split-Frequency Sonar View

In the split-frequency sonar view, the two sides of the screen show a full-view graph of sonar data of different

frequencies.

NOTE: The split-frequency sonar view requires the use of a dual-frequency transducer.

70 Sonar Fishfinder

Split-Zoom Sonar View

The split-zoom sonar view shows a full-view graph of sonar readings, and a magnified portion of that graph, on

the same screen.

Garmin ClearVü Sonar View

NOTE: To receive Garmin ClearVü scanning sonar, you need a compatible transducer. For information about

compatible transducers, go to garmin.com/transducers.

Garmin ClearVü high-frequency sonar provides a detailed picture of the fishing environment around the boat in a

detailed representation of structures the boat is passing over.

Traditional transducers emit a conical beam. The Garmin ClearVü scanning sonar technology emits a beam

similar to the shape of the beam in a copy machine. This beam provides a clearer, picture-like image of what is

beneath the boat.

Sonar Fishfinder 71

Garmin SideVü Sonar View

Not all models provide built-in Garmin SideVü sonar support. If your model does not provide built-in SideVü

sonar, you need a compatible sounder module and compatible SideVü transducer.

If your model does provide built-in SideVü sonar, you need a compatible SideVü transducer.

SideVü scanning sonar technology shows you a picture of what lies to the sides of the boat. You can use this as

a search tool to find structures and fish.

Left side of the boat

Right side of the boat

The transducer on your vessel

Logs

Old tires

Trees

Water between the vessel and the bottom

Distance from the side of the boat

72 Sonar Fishfinder

SideVü Scanning Technology

Instead of a more common conical beam, the SideVü transducer uses a flat beam to scan the water and bottom

to the sides of your boat.

Measuring Distance on the Sonar Screen

You can measure the distance between two points on the SideVü sonar view.

1 From the SideVü sonar view, select .

2 Select a location on the screen.

3 Select Measure.

A push pin appears on the screen at the selected location.

4 Select another location.

The distance and angle from the pin is listed in the upper-left corner.

TIP: To reset the pin and measure from the current location of the pin, select Set Reference.

Panoptix Sonar Views

To receive Panoptix sonar, you need a compatible transducer.

The Panoptix sonar views allow you to see all around the boat in real time. You can also watch your bait

underwater and bait schools in front of or below your boat.

The LiveVü sonar views provide you a view of the live movement either in front of or below your boat. The

screen updates very quickly, producing sonar views that look more like live video.

The RealVü 3D sonar views provide three-dimensional views of either what is in front of or below your boat. The

screen updates with each sweep of the transducer.

To see all five Panoptix sonar views, you need one transducer to show the down views and a second transducer

to show the forward views.

To access the Panoptix sonar views, select Sonar, and select a view.

Sonar Fishfinder 73

LiveVü Down Sonar View

This sonar view shows a two-dimensional view of what is below the boat and can be used to see a bait ball and

fish.

Panoptix down view history in a scrolling sonar view

Boat

Range

Trails

Drop shot rig

Bottom

74 Sonar Fishfinder

LiveVü Forward Sonar View

This sonar view shows a two-dimensional view of what is in front of the boat and can be used to see a bait ball

and fish.

Boat

Range

Fish

Trails

Bottom

Sonar Fishfinder 75

RealVü 3D Forward Sonar View

This sonar view shows a three-dimensional view of what is in front of the transducer. This view can be used

when you are stationary and you need to see the bottom and the fish approaching the boat.

Color legend

Boat

Ping indicator

Fish

Bottom

Range

76 Sonar Fishfinder

RealVü 3D Down Sonar View

This sonar view shows a three-dimensional view of what is below the transducer and can be used when you are

stationary and want to see what is around your boat.

Color legend

Boat

Sonar beam

Range

Fish

Bottom

Sonar Fishfinder 77

RealVü 3D Historical Sonar View

This sonar view provides a three-dimensional view of what is behind your boat as you are moving and shows the

entire water column in 3D, from the bottom to the top of the water. This view is used for finding fish.

Color legend

Boat

Range

Bottom

Structure

Fish

78 Sonar Fishfinder

FrontVü Sonar View

The Panoptix FrontVü sonar view increases your situational awareness by showing obstructions under the

water, up to 91meters (300feet) in front of the boat.

The ability to effectively avoid forward collisions with FrontVü sonar decreases as your speed rises above 8

knots.

To see the FrontVü sonar view, you must install and connect a compatible transducer, such as a PS21

transducer. You may need to update the transducer software.

LiveScope Sonar View

This sonar view shows a live view of what is in front of or below the boat and can be used to see fish and

structures.

Depth information

Suspended targets or fish

Bottom of the body of water

Sonar Fishfinder 79

Perspective View

This sonar view shows a live view of what is around and ahead of your boat and can be used to see shorelines,

fish, and structures. This view is best used in shallow water of 50feet (15meters) or less.

To see this sonar view, you must install a compatible LiveScope transducer on compatible a perspective mode

mount.

Selecting the Transducer Type

This chartplotter is compatible with a range of accessory transducers, including the Garmin ClearVü

transducers, which are available at garmin.com/transducers.

If you are connecting a transducer that was not included with the chartplotter, you may need to set the

transducer type to make the sonar function properly.

NOTE: Not all chartplotters and sonar modules support this feature.

1 Complete an action:

• From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation > Transducers.

• Select Settings > My Vessel > Transducers.

2 Select an option:

• To enable the chartplotter to detect the transducer automatically, select the transducer to change, and

select Auto Detect.

• To select the transducer manually, learn the range for the installed transducer, select the transducer to

change, select the option that matches the installed transducer, such as Dual Beam (200/77 kHz) or Dual

Freq (200/50 kHz), and select Change Model.

NOTICE

Manually selecting a transducer could result in damage to the transducer or reduced transducer performance.

NOTE: If you select the transducer manually, disconnect that transducer, and then connect a different

transducer, you should reset this option to Auto Detect.

Selecting a Sonar Source

This feature may not be available with all models.

When you are using more than one sonar data source for a particular sonar view, you can select the source to

use for that sonar view. For example, if you have two sources for Garmin ClearVü, you can select the source to

use from the Garmin ClearVü sonar view.

1 Open the sonar view for which you will change the source.

2 Select Options > Sonar Setup > Source.

3 Select the source for this sonar view.

80 Sonar Fishfinder

Renaming a Sonar Source

You can rename a sonar source to easily identify that source. For example, you use "Bow" as the name of the

transducer on the bow of your boat.

To rename a source, you must be in the applicable sonar view for the source. For example, to rename the

Garmin ClearVü sonar source, you must open the Garmin ClearVü sonar view.

1 From the sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Source > Rename Sources.

2 Enter the name.

Creating a Waypoint on the Sonar Screen

1 From a sonar view, drag the screen or select .

2 Select a location.

3 Select .

4 If necessary, edit the waypoint information.

Pausing the Sonar Display

From a sonar view, select .

Viewing Sonar History

You can scroll the sonar display to view historical sonar data.

NOTE: Not all transducers save historical sonar data.

1 From a sonar view, drag the screen to the right.

2 Select Back to exit history.

Sonar Sharing

You can view the sonar data from all compatible sources on the Garmin Marine Network. You can view sonar

data from a compatible external sonar module, such as a GCV

™

sonar module. In addition, you can view the

sonar data from other chartplotters that have a built-in sonar module.

Each chartplotter on the network can display sonar data from every compatible sonar module and transducer on

the network, no matter where the chartplotters and transducers are mounted on your boat. For example, from

one GPSMAP 923 device mounted at the back of the boat, you can view the sonar data from another GPSMAP

device and Garmin ClearVü transducer mounted at the front of your boat.

When sharing sonar data, the values of some sonar settings, such as Range and Gain, are synchronized across

the devices on the network. The values of other sonar settings, such as the Appearance settings, are not

synchronized and should be configured on each individual device. In addition, the scroll rates of the various

traditional and Garmin ClearVü sonar views are synchronized to make the split views more cohesive.

NOTE: Using multiple transducers simultaneously can create cross talk, which can be removed by adjusting the

Interference sonar setting.

Sonar Fishfinder 81

Zooming in a Panoptix LiveVü or LiveScope Sonar View

You can zoom in on the Panoptix LiveVü and LiveScope 2D sonar views.

NOTE: The scrolling history is hidden while the screen is in zoom mode.

1 From a Panoptix LiveVü or LiveScope 2D sonar view, spread two fingers apart to zoom in on the area.

An inset window appears and displays a small version of the full-screen image. The boxed area in the

inset shows the location of the zoomed area.

2 If necessary, tap or drag within the inset window to view a different area of the full-screen view.

3 If necessary, spread two fingers apart to zoom in.

4 If necessary, pinch two fingers together to zoom out.

To exit zoom mode, select Back or pinch two fingers together to zoom out until the screen returns to a

full-screen view.

Adjusting the Level of Detail

You can control the level of detail and noise shown on the sonar screen either by adjusting the gain for

traditional transducers or by adjusting the brightness for Garmin ClearVü transducers.

If you want to see the highest intensity signal returns on the screen, you can lower the gain or brightness to

remove lower intensity returns and noise. If you want to see all return information, you can increase the gain or

brightness to see more information on the screen. This also increases noise, and can make it more difficult to

recognize actual returns.

1 From a sonar view, select Options.

2 Select Gain or Brightness.

3 Select an option:

• To increase or decrease the gain or brightness manually, select Up or Down.

• To allow the chartplotter to adjust the gain or brightness automatically, select an automatic option.

82 Sonar Fishfinder

Adjusting the Color Intensity

You can adjust the intensity of colors and highlight areas of interest on the sonar screen by adjusting the color

gain for traditional transducers or the contrast for Garmin ClearVü/SideVü transducers. This setting works best

after you have adjusted the level of detail shown on the screen using the gain or brightness settings.

If you want to highlight smaller fish targets or create a higher intensity display of a target, you can increase

the color gain or contrast setting. This causes a loss in the differentiation of the high intensity returns at the

bottom. If you want to reduce the intensity of the return, you can reduce the color gain or contrast.

1 From a sonar view, select Options.

2 Select an option:

• While in the Garmin ClearVü/SideVü sonar view, select Contrast.

• While in a Panoptix sonar view, select Appearance.

• While in another sonar view, select Sonar Setup > Appearance > Color Gain.

3 Select an option:

• To increase or decrease the color intensity manually, select Up or Down.

• To use the default setting, select Default.

Sonar Setup

NOTE: Not all options and settings apply to all models and transducers.

These settings apply to the following types of transducers.

• Traditional

• Garmin ClearVü

• SideVü

These settings do not apply to Panoptix transducers.

From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup.

Scroll Speed: Sets the rate at which the sonar scrolls from right to left (Setting the Scroll Speed, page84).

In shallow water, you can select a slower scroll speed to extend the length of time the information is

displayed on screen. In deeper water, you can select a faster scroll speed. Automatic scroll speed adjusts the

scrolling speed to the speed the boat is traveling.

Noise Reject: Reduces the interference and the amount of clutter shown on the sonar screen (Sonar Noise

Rejection Settings, page85).

Appearance: Configures the appearance of the sonar screen (Sonar Appearance Settings, page85).

Alarms: Sets sonar alarms (Sonar Alarms, page86).

Advanced: Configures various sonar display and data source settings (Advanced Sonar Settings, page87).

Installation: Configures the transducer (Transducer Installation Settings, page87).

Sonar Fishfinder 83

Setting the Zoom Level on the Sonar Screen

1 From a sonar view, select Options > Zoom > > Mode.

2 Select an option:

• To set the depth and zoom automatically, select Auto.

If necessary, select Set Zoom to modify the zoom setting. Select View Up or View Down to set the depth

range of the magnified area, and select Zoom In or Zoom Out to increase or decrease the magnification of

the magnified area.

• To set the depth range of the magnified area manually, select Manual.

If necessary, select Set Zoom to modify the zoom setting. Select View Up or View Down to set the depth

range of the magnified area, and select Zoom In or Zoom Out to increase or decrease the magnification of

the magnified area.

• To magnify one particular area of the screen, select Magnify.

If necessary, select Magnify to increase or decrease the magnification level.

TIP: You can drag the magnification box to a new location on the screen.

• To zoom in on the sonar data from the bottom depth, select Bottom Lock.

If necessary, select Span to adjust the depth and placement of the bottom lock area.

To cancel the zoom, deselect the Zoom option.

Setting the Scroll Speed

You can set the rate at which the sonar image moves across the screen. A higher scroll speed shows more

detail until there is no additional detail to show, at which point it starts stretching out the existing detail. This

can be useful while moving or trolling, or when you are in very deep water where the sonar is pinging very slowly.

A lower scroll speed displays sonar information on the screen longer.

For most situations, the Default setting provides a good balance between a quickly scrolling image and less

distorted targets.

1 From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Scroll Speed.

2 Select an option:

• To adjust the scroll speed automatically using speed-over-ground or water speed data, select Auto.

The Auto setting selects a scroll rate to match the boat speed, so targets in the water are drawn with

the correct aspect ratio and appear less distorted. When viewing Garmin ClearVü/SideVü sonar views or

searching for structure, it is recommend to use the Auto setting.

• To scroll faster, select Up.

• To scroll more slowly, select Down.

Adjusting the Range

You can adjust the range of the depth scale for traditional and Garmin ClearVü sonar views. You can adjust the

range of the width scale for the SideVü sonar view.

Allowing the device to adjust the range automatically keeps the bottom within the lower or outer third of the

sonar screen, and can be useful for tracking a bottom that has minimal or moderate terrain changes.

Manually adjusting the range enables you to view a specified range, which can be useful for tracking a bottom

that has large terrain changes, such as a drop-offs or cliffs. The bottom can appear on the screen as long as it

appears within the range you have set.

1 From a sonar view, select Options > Range.

2 Select an option:

• To allow the chartplotter to adjust the range automatically, select Auto.

• To increase or decrease the range manually, select Up or Down.

TIP: From the sonar screen, you can select or to manually adjust the range.

TIP: When viewing multiple sonar screens, you can select Select to choose the active screen.

84 Sonar Fishfinder

Sonar Noise Rejection Settings

From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Noise Reject.

Interference: Adjusts the sensitivity to reduce the effects of interference from nearby sources of noise.

The lowest interference setting that achieves the desired improvement should be used to remove

interference from the screen. Correcting installation issues that cause noise is the best way to eliminate

interference.

Color Limit: Hides part of the color palette to help eliminate fields of weak clutter.

By setting the color limit to the color of the undesired returns, you can eliminate the display of undesired

returns on the screen.

Smoothing: Removes noise that is not part of a normal sonar return, and adjusts the appearance of returns,

such as the bottom.

When smoothing is set to high, more of the low-level noise remains than when using the interference control,

but the noise is more subdued because of averaging. Smoothing can remove speckle from the bottom.

Smoothing and interference work well together to eliminate low-level noise. You can adjust the interference

and smoothing settings incrementally to remove undesirable noise from the display.

Surface Noise: Hides surface noise to help reduce clutter. Wider beam widths (lower frequencies) can show

more targets, but can generate more surface noise.

TVG: Adjusts the time varying gain, which can reduce noise.

This control is best used for situations when you want to control and suppress clutter or noise near the water

surface. It also allows for the display of targets near the surface that are otherwise hidden or masked by

surface noise.

Sonar Appearance Settings

From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Appearance.

Color Scheme: Sets the color scheme.

Color Gain: Adjusts the intensity of colors (Adjusting the Color Intensity, page83).

A-Scope: Displays a vertical flasher along the right side of the screen that shows instantaneously the range to

targets along a scale.

Depth Line: Shows a quick-reference depth line.

Edge: Highlights the strongest signal from the bottom to help define the hardness or softness of the signal.

View Selection: Sets the direction of the Garmin SideVü sonar view.

Fish Symbols: Sets how the sonar interprets suspended targets.

Shows suspended targets as symbols and background sonar information.

Shows suspended targets as symbols with target depth information and background sonar informa

tion.

Shows suspended targets as symbols.

Shows suspended targets as symbols with target depth information.

Pic. Advance

: Allows the sonar picture to advance faster by drawing more than one column of data on

the screen for each column of sounder data received. This is especially helpful when you are using the

sounder in deep water, because the sonar signal takes longer to travel to the water bottom and back to the

transducer.

The 1/1 setting draws one column of information on the screen per sounder return. The 2/1 setting draws

two columns of information on the screen per sounder return, and so on for the 4/1 and 8/1 settings.

Echo Stretch: Adjusts the size of the echoes on the screen to make it easier to see separate returns on the

screen.

Sonar Fishfinder 85

When targets are difficult to see , echo stretch makes the target returns more pronounced and easier to

see on the screen. If the echo stretch value is too high, the targets blend together. If the value is too low ,

the targets are small and more difficult to see.

You can use echo stretch and filter width together to obtain the preferable resolution and noise reduction.

With echo stretch and filter width set to low, the display has the highest resolution, but is the most

susceptible to noise. With echo stretch set to high and filter width set to low, the display has a lower

resolution, but has wider targets. With echo stretch and filter width set to high, the display has the lowest

resolution, but is the least susceptible to noise. It is not recommended to set echo stretch to low and filter

width to high.

Overlay Data: Sets the data shown on the sonar screen.

Sonar Alarms

WARNING

The sonar alarms feature is a tool for situational awareness only and may not prevent grounding in all

circumstances. It is your obligation to ensure safe operation of the vessel.

CAUTION

The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page164). Failure

to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.

NOTE: Not all options are available on all transducers.

From an applicable sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Alarms.

You can also open the sonar alarms by selecting Settings > Alarms > Sonar.

Shallow Water: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth is less than the specified value.

Deep Water: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth is greater than the specified value.

FrontVü Alarm: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth in front of the vessel is less than the specified value,

which can help you avoid running aground (Setting the FrontVü Depth Alarm, page91). This alarm is

available only with Panoptix FrontVü transducers.

Water Temp.: Sets an alarm to sound when the transducer reports a temperature that is 2°F (1.1°C) above or

below the specified temperature.

Contour: Sets an alarm to sound when the transducer detects a suspended target within the specified depth

from the surface of the water and from the bottom.

Fish: Sets an alarm to sound when the device detects a suspended target.

• sets the alarm to sound when fish of all sizes are detected.

• sets the alarm to sound only when medium or large fish are detected.

• sets the alarm to sound only when large fish are detected.

86 Sonar Fishfinder

Advanced Sonar Settings

From a Traditional sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Advanced.

Shift: Allows you to set the depth range on which the sonar is focused. This allows you to zoom in a higher

resolution in the focused depth.

When using shift, bottom tracking may not work effectively, because the sonar looks for data within the depth

range of the focused area, which may not include the bottom. Using shift also can impact the scroll speed,

because data outside the depth range of the focused area is not processed, which reduces the time required

to receive and display the data. You can zoom in to the focused area, which enables you to evaluate target

returns more closely at a higher resolution than just zooming alone.

Btm. Srch. Limit: Limits the search for the bottom to the depth selected when the Range setting is set to Auto.

To minimize the length of time it takes to find the bottom, you can select a depth to limit the search for the

bottom. The device will not search for the bottom deeper than the selected depth.

Transducer Installation Settings

These settings apply to the following types of sonar.

• Traditional

• Garmin ClearVü

• Garmin SideVü

From an applicable sonar view, select an option.

• From a Traditional sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation.

• From a Garmin ClearVü sonar view, select Options > ClearVü Setup > Installation.

• From a Garmin SideVü sonar view, select Options > SideVü Setup > Installation.

Transmit Rate: Sets the length of time between sonar pings. Increasing the transmit rate increases the scroll

speed, but it may also increase self-interference.

Reducing the transmit rate increases the spacing between transmit pulses and can resolve self-interference.

This option is available on the Traditional sonar view only.

Transmit Power: Reduces transducer ringing near the surface. A lower transmit power value reduces transducer

ringing, but can also reduce the strength of the returns. This option is available on the Traditional sonar view

only.

Filter Width: Defines the edges of the target. A shorter filter more clearly defines the edges of the targets but

may allow more noise. A longer filter creates softer target edges and may also reduce noise. This option is

available on the Traditional sonar view only.

Flip Left/Right: Switches the SideVü view orientation from left to right. This option is available on the SideVü

sonar view only.

Restore Sonar Defaults: Restores the sonar settings to the factory default values.

Transducers: Allows you to change the transducer, view details about the transducers, and save details to a

memory card.

Sonar Fishfinder 87

Sonar Frequencies

NOTE: The frequencies available depend on the transducers being used.

Adjusting the frequency helps adapt the sonar for your particular goals and the present depth of the water.

Higher frequencies use narrow beam widths, and are better for high-speed operation and rough sea conditions.

Bottom definition and thermocline definition can be better when using a higher frequency.

Lower frequencies use wider beam widths, which can let the fisherman see more targets, but could also

generate more surface noise and reduce bottom signal continuity during rough sea conditions. Wider beam

widths generate larger arches for fish target returns, making them ideal for locating fish. Wider beam widths

also perform better in deep water, because the lower frequency has better deep water penetration.

CHIRP frequencies allow you to sweep each pulse through a range of frequencies, resulting in better target

separation in deep water. CHIRP can be used to distinctly identify targets, like individual fish in a school, and

for deep water applications. CHIRP generally performs better than single frequency applications. Because some

fish targets may show up better using a fixed frequency, you should consider your goals and water conditions

when using CHIRP frequencies.

Some transducers also provide the ability to customize preset frequencies for each transducer element, which

enables you to change the frequency quickly using the presets as the water and your goals change.

Viewing two frequencies concurrently using the split-frequency view allows you to see deeper with the lower

frequency return and, at the same time, see more detail from the higher frequency return.

NOTICE

Always be aware of local regulations on sonar frequencies. For example, to protect orca whale pods, you might

be prohibited from using frequencies between 50 to 80khz within

mile of an orca whale pod. It is your

responsibility to use the device in compliance with all applicable laws and ordinances.

Selecting the Transducer Frequency

NOTE: You cannot adjust the frequency for all sonar views and transducers.

You can select which frequencies appear on the sonar screen.

NOTICE

Always be aware of local regulations on sonar frequencies. For example, to protect orca whale pods, you might

be prohibited from using frequencies between 50 to 80khz within ½ mile of an orca whale pod. It is your

responsibility to use the device in compliance with all applicable laws and ordinances.

1 From a sonar view, select Options > Frequency.

2 Select a frequency suited to your needs and water depth.

For more information on frequencies, see Sonar Frequencies, page88.

Creating a Frequency Preset

NOTE: Not available with all transducers.

You can create a preset to save a specific sonar frequency, which allows you to change frequencies quickly.

1 From a sonar view, select Options > Frequency.

2 Select Manage Frequencies > New Preset.

3 Enter a frequency.

88 Sonar Fishfinder

Turning On the A-Scope

NOTE: This feature is available in the Traditional sonar views.

The a-scope is a vertical flasher along the right side of the view, showing you what is underneath the transducer

right now. You can use the a-scope to identify target returns that may be missed when the sonar data is

quickly scrolling across the screen, such as when your boat is moving at high speeds. It can also be helpful for

detecting fish that are close to the bottom.

The a-scope above shows fish returns and a soft bottom return .

1 From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Appearance > A-Scope.

2 If necessary, select > Peak Hold to adjust the length of time the sonar returns are displayed.

Panoptix Sonar Setup

Adjusting the RealVü Viewing Angle and Zoom Level

You can change the viewing angle of the RealVü sonar views. You can also zoom in and out of the view.

From a RealVü sonar view, select an option:

• To adjust the viewing angle diagonally, select .

• To adjust the viewing angle horizontally, select .

• To adjust the viewing angle vertically, select .

• To adjust the viewing angle, swipe the screen in any direction.

• To zoom in, spread two fingers apart.

• To zoom out, pinch two fingers together.

Adjusting the RealVü Sweep Speed

You can update how quickly the transducer sweeps back and forth. A faster sweep rate creates a less detailed

image, but the screen refreshes faster. A slower sweep rate creates a more detailed image, but the screen

refreshes more slowly.

NOTE: This feature is not available for the RealVü 3D Historical sonar view.

1 From a RealVü sonar view, select Options > Sweep Speed.

2 Select an option.

Sonar Fishfinder 89

LiveVü Forward and FrontVü Sonar Settings

From the LiveVü Forward or FrontVü sonar view, select Options.

Gain: Controls the level of detail and noise shown on the sonar screen.

If you want to see the highest intensity signal returns on the screen, you can lower the gain to remove lower

intensity returns and noise. If you want to see all return information, you can increase the gain to see more

information on the screen. This also increases noise, and can make it more difficult to recognize actual

returns.

Depth Range: Adjusts the range of the depth scale.

Allowing the device to adjust the range automatically keeps the bottom within the lower portion of the sonar

screen, and can be useful for tracking a bottom that has minimal or moderate terrain changes.

Manually adjusting the range enables you to view a specified range, which can be useful for tracking a

bottom that has large terrain changes, such as a drop-offs or cliffs. The bottom can appear on the screen as

long as it appears within the range you have set.

Forward Range: Adjusts the range of the forward scale.

Allowing the device to adjust the range automatically adjusts the forward scale in relation to the depth.

Manually adjusting the range enables you to view a specified range. The bottom can appear on the screen as

long as it appears within the range you have set. Manually reducing this option can reduce the effectiveness

of the FrontVü Alarm, reducing your reaction time to low depth readings.

Transmit Angle: Adjusts the focus of the transducer to the port or starboard side. This feature is available only

with RealVü capable Panoptix transducers, such as the PS31 transducer.

Transmit: Stops the active transducer from transmitting.

FrontVü Alarm: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth in front of the vessel is less than the specified value

(Setting the FrontVü Depth Alarm, page91). This is available only with Panoptix FrontVü transducers.

Sonar Setup: Adjusts the setup of the transducer and the appearance of the sonar returns.

Edit Overlays: Adjusts the data shown on the screen (Customizing the Data Overlays, page17).

Setting the LiveVü and FrontVü Transducer Transmit Angle

This feature is available only with RealVü capable Panoptix transducers, such as the PS30, PS31, and PS60.

You can change the transducer transmit angle to aim the transducer at a particular area of interest. For

example, you might aim the transducer to follow a bait ball or focus on a tree as you pass it.

1 From a LiveVü or FrontVü sonar view, select Options > Transmit Angle.

2 Select an option.

90 Sonar Fishfinder

Setting the FrontVü Depth Alarm

WARNING

FrontVü sonar and the FrontVü depth alarm are tools for situational awareness only, and may not prevent

groundings in all circumstances. As vessel speeds approach and exceed 8 knots, your ability to effectively

respond to the information provided by the sonar and/or alarm decreases. It is your responsibility to remain

aware of your surroundings while underway and to operate your vessel in a safe and prudent manner. Failure to

do so could result in an accident leading to property damage, personal injury, or death.

CAUTION

The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page164). Failure

to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.

This alarm is available only with Panoptix FrontVü transducers.

You can set an alarm to sound when the depth is below a specified level. For best results, you should set the

bow offset when using the front collision alarm (Setting the Bow Offset, page93).

1 From the FrontVü sonar view, select Options > FrontVü Alarm.

2 Select On.

3 Enter the depth at which the alarm is triggered, and select Done.

On the FrontVü screen, a depth line shows the depth at which the alarm is set. The line is green when you are in

a safe depth. The line turns yellow when you are going faster than the forward range gives you time to react (10

seconds). It turns red and sounds an alarm when the system detects an obstruction or the depth is less than the

entered value.

LiveVü and FrontVü Appearance Settings

From a LiveVü or FrontVü Panoptix sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Appearance.

Color Scheme: Sets the color palette.

Color Gain: Adjusts the intensity of colors shown on the screen.

You can select a higher color gain value to see targets higher in the water column. A higher color gain value

also allow you to differentiate low intensity returns higher in the water column, but this causes a loss in the

differentiation of the returns at the bottom. You can select a lower color gain value when targets are near the

bottom, to help you distinguish between targets and high intensity returns such as sand, rock, and mud.

Trails: Sets the how long the trails appear on the screen. The trails show the movement of the target.

Bottom Fill: Colors the bottom brown to distinguish it from the water returns.

LiveVü and FrontVü Layout Settings

From a LiveVü or FrontVü Panoptix sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Layout.

Grid Overlay: Shows a grid of range lines.

Scroll History: Shows the sonar history on the side of the screen.

Beam Icon: Selects the icon used to show the direction of the transducer beam.

On-screen Control: Shows the on-screen buttons.

Compress Range: In forward views, compresses the forward range farther away from the boat and expands the

range closer to the boat. This allows you to see closer objects more clearly while keeping farther objects on

the screen.

Sonar Fishfinder 91

RealVü Appearance Settings

From a RealVü sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Appearance.

Point Colors: Sets a different color palette for the sonar return points.

Bottom Colors: Sets the color scheme for the bottom.

Bottom Style: Sets the style for the bottom. When you are in deep water, you can select the Points option and

manually set the range to a shallower value.

Color Key: Shows a legend of the depths the colors represent.

On-screen Control: Shows or hides the on-screen buttons.

Panoptix Transducer Installation Settings

From a Panoptix sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation.

Install Depth: Sets the depth below the water line where the Panoptix transducer is mounted. Entering the actual

depth at which the transducer is mounted results in a more accurate visual presentation of what is in the

water.

Bow Offset: Sets the distance between the bow and the forward view Panoptix transducer installation location.

This allows you to view the forward distance from the bow instead of the transducer location.

This applies to Panoptix transducers in the FrontVü, LiveVü Forward, and RealVü 3D Forward sonar views.

Beam Width: Sets the width of the down view Panoptix transducer beam. Narrow beam widths allow you to see

deeper and farther. Wider beam widths allow you to see more coverage area.

This applies to Panoptix transducers in the FrontVü, LiveVü Down, and LiveVü Forward sonar views.

Use AHRS: Enables the internal attitude heading and reference system (AHRS) sensors to detect the installation

angle of the Panoptix transducer automatically. When this setting is turned off, you can enter the specific

installation angle for the transducer using the Pitch Angle setting. Many forward view transducers are

installed at a 45-degree angle and down view transducers are installed at a zero-degree angle.

Flipped: Sets the orientation of the Panoptix sonar view when the down view transducer is installed with the

cables pointing toward the port side of the boat.

This applies to Panoptix transducers in the LiveVü Down, RealVü 3D Down, and RealVü 3D Historical sonar

views.

Calibrate Compass: Calibrates the internal compass in the Panoptix transducer (Calibrating the Compass,

page93).

This applies to Panoptix transducers with an internal compass, such as the PS21-TR transducer.

Orientation: Controls if the transducer is in down or forward installation mode. The Auto setting uses the AHRS

sensor to determine the orientation.

This applies to PS22 transducers.

Restore Sonar Defaults: Restores the sonar settings to the factory default values.

92 Sonar Fishfinder

Setting the Bow Offset

For forward view Panoptix transducers, you can enter a bow offset to compensate the forward distance

readings for the transducer installation location. This allows you to view the forward distance from the bow

instead of the transducer installation location.

This feature applies to Panoptix transducers in the FrontVü, LiveVü Forward, and RealVü 3D Forward sonar

views.

1 Measure the horizontal distance from the transducer to the bow.

2 From an applicable sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation > Bow Offset.

3 Enter the distance measured, and select Done.

On the applicable sonar view, the forward range shifts by the distance you entered.

Calibrating the Compass

Before you can calibrate the compass, the transducer must be installed far enough away from the trolling motor

to avoid magnetic interference, and deployed in the water. Calibration must be of sufficient quality to enable the

internal compass.

NOTE: The compass may not work if you mount the transducer on the motor.

NOTE: For best results, you should use a heading sensor such as the SteadyCast

™

heading sensor. The heading

sensor shows the direction the transducer is pointing relative to the boat.

NOTE: Compass calibration is available only for transducers with an internal compass, such as the PS21-TR

transducer.

You can begin turning your boat before calibrating, but you must fully rotate your boat 1.5 times during

calibration.

1 From an applicable sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation.

2 If necessary, select Use AHRS to turn on the AHRS sensor.

3 Select Calibrate Compass.

4 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Sonar Fishfinder 93

LiveScope and Perspective Sonar Settings

From the LiveScope or Perspective sonar view, select Options.

Gain: Controls the level of detail and noise shown on the sonar screen.

If you want to see the highest intensity signal returns on the screen, you can lower the gain to remove

lower intensity returns and noise. If you want to see all return information, you can increase the gain to see

more information on the screen. Increasing the gain also increases noise, and can make it more difficult to

recognize actual returns.

Depth Range: Adjusts the range of the depth scale.

Allowing the device to adjust the range automatically keeps the bottom within the lower portion of the sonar

screen, and can be useful for tracking a bottom that has minimal or moderate terrain changes.

Manually adjusting the range enables you to view a specified range, which can be useful for tracking a

bottom that has large terrain changes, such as a drop-offs or cliffs. The bottom can appear on the screen as

long as it appears within the range you have set.

Available in LiveScope sonar view.

Forward Range: Adjusts the range of the forward scale.

Allowing the device to adjust the range automatically adjusts the forward scale in relation to the depth.

Manually adjusting the range enables you to view a specified range. The bottom can appear on the screen as

long as it appears within the range you have set.

Available in LiveScope sonar view.

Range: Adjusts the range.

Allowing the device to adjust the range automatically keeps the bottom within the lower or outer third of the

sonar screen, and can be useful for tracking a bottom that has minimal or moderate terrain changes.

Manually adjusting the range enables you to view a specified range, which can be useful for tracking a

bottom that has large terrain changes, such as a drop-offs or cliffs. The bottom can appear on the screen as

long as it appears within the range you have set.

Available in Perspective sonar view.

Transmit: Stops the active transducer from transmitting.

Sonar Setup: Adjusts the setup of the transducer and the appearance of the sonar returns (LiveScope and

Perspective Sonar Setup, page94).

Edit Overlays: Adjusts the data shown on the screen (Customizing the Data Overlays, page17).

LiveScope and Perspective Sonar Setup

From the LiveScope or Perspective sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup.

Appearance: Configures the appearance of the sonar screen (LiveScope and Perspective Appearance Settings,

page95).

Layout: Configures the layout of the sonar screen (LiveScope and Perspective Layout Settings, page95).

Noise Reject: Reduces noise and interference and attempts to remove returns that are not actually targets in the

water.

Ghost Reject: Reduces the occurrence of "ghost" images, which are duplicated or reflected images that are not

actually targets in the water. The Ghost Reject setting sends more transmit power forward in the water to

see farther with less noise generated by the bottom. Adjusting the Ghost Reject and Noise Reject settings

together reduces the occurrence of "ghost" images most effectively. This feature is available in LiveScope

Forward orientation only.

TVG: Adjusts the time varying gain, which can reduce noise.

This control is best used for situations when you want to control and suppress clutter or noise near the water

surface. It also allows for the display of targets near the surface that are otherwise hidden or masked by

surface noise.

Overlay Data: Sets the data shown on the sonar screen.

Installation: Configures the transducer (LiveScope and Perspective Transducer Installation Settings, page95).

94 Sonar Fishfinder

LiveScope and Perspective Appearance Settings

From the LiveScope or Perspective sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Appearance.

Color Scheme: Sets the color palette.

Color Gain: Adjusts the contrast of colors shown on the screen.

You can select a higher color gain value to see minor variances in targets with large color changes. You can

select a lower color gain value to see more similar colors in the same situation.

Trails: Sets the how long the trails appear on the screen. The trails show the movement of the target.

Bottom Fill: Colors the bottom brown to distinguish it from the water returns. Not available in Perspective mode.

LiveScope and Perspective Layout Settings

From the LiveScope or Perspective sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Layout.

Grid Overlay: Shows a grid of range lines. The Grid option shows a square grid. The Radial option shows a

circular grid with radial angle lines.

Scroll History: Shows the sonar history on the side of the screen. Not available in Perspective mode.

Beam Icon: Selects the icon used to show the direction of the transducer beam.

Beam Overlay: Enables an outline to show where the transducers are oriented in relation to each other, when

two or more calibrated Panoptix transducers are connected.

On-screen Control: Shows the on-screen buttons.

Reverse Range: Adjusts the amount of range shown behind the transducer.

Compress Range: In forward views, compresses the forward range farther away from the boat and expands the

range closer to the boat. This allows you to see closer objects more clearly while keeping farther objects on

the screen.

LiveScope and Perspective Transducer Installation Settings

From the LiveScope or Perspective sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation.

Install Depth: Sets the depth below the water line where the Panoptix transducer is mounted. Entering the actual

depth at which the transducer is mounted results in a more accurate visual presentation of what is in the

water.

Use AHRS: Enables the internal attitude heading and reference system (AHRS) sensors to detect the installation

angle of the Panoptix transducer automatically. When this setting is turned off, you can enter the specific

installation angle for the transducer using the Pitch Angle setting. Many forward view transducers are

installed at a 45-degree angle and down view transducers are installed at a zero-degree angle.

Calibrate Compass: Calibrates the internal compass in the Panoptix transducer (Calibrating the Compass,

page93).

This applies to LiveScope transducers with an internal compass.

Orientation: Controls if the transducer is in down or forward installation mode. The Auto setting uses the AHRS

sensor to determine the orientation.

Focus: Adjusts the sonar view to compensate for the speed of sound in water. The Auto setting uses the

temperature of the water to calculate the speed of sound.

Restore Sonar Defaults: Restores the sonar settings to the factory default values.

Sonar Fishfinder 95

Radar

WARNING

The marine radar transmits microwave energy that has the potential to be harmful to humans and animals.

Before beginning radar transmission, verify that the area around the radar is clear. The radar transmits a beam

approximately 12° above and below a line extending horizontally from the center of the radar.

To avoid possible personal injury, do not look directly at the antenna at close range when the radar is

transmitting. Eyes are the most sensitive part of the body to electromagnetic energy.

When you connect your compatible chartplotter to an optional Garmin marine radar, such as a GMR

™

Fantom

™

radar or a GMR 24 xHD, you can view more information about your surroundings.

The radar transmits a narrow beam of microwave energy as it rotates to a 360° pattern. When the transmitted

energy contacts a target, some of that energy is reflected back to the radar.

Radar Interpretation

Reading and interpreting the radar display takes practice. The more you use the radar, the better you will

become at relying on the radar display when you really need it.

Radar can be useful in many situations, such as avoiding collisions when you have limited visibility, for example

when it is dark or foggy, tracking weather, seeing what is ahead of you, and locating birds and fish.

The radar overlay feature can help you interpret the radar display more easily, because it overlays the radar

returns on top of the chart. This can help you identify the difference between a radar return of a land mass,

bridge, or rain cloud. Showing the AIS vessels on the radar overlay can also help you identify features on the

radar display.

In the screenshot below, the radar overlay is turned on. This screen also shows a video feed. We can easily

identify a few items on the radar screen.

Land

Vessel

Radar Overlay

When you connect your chartplotter to an optional Garmin marine radar, you can use overlay radar information

on the Navigation chart or on the Fishing chart.

Data appears on the radar overlay based on the most recently used radar mode and all settings configurations

applied to the radar overlay are also applied to the last-used radar mode.

96 Radar

Radar Overlay and Chart Data Alignment

When using the Radar overlay, the chartplotter aligns radar data with chart data based on the boat heading,

which is based by default on data from a magnetic heading sensor connected using a NMEA 0183 or NMEA

2000 network. If a heading sensor is not available, the boat heading is based on GPS tracking data.

GPS tracking data indicates the direction in which the boat is moving, not the direction in which the boat

is pointing. If the boat is drifting backward or sideways due to a current or wind, the Radar overlay may

not perfectly align with the chart data. This situation should be avoided by using boat-heading data from an

electronic compass.

If the boat heading is based on data from a magnetic heading sensor or an automatic pilot, the heading data

could be compromised due to incorrect setup, mechanical malfunction, magnetic interference, or other factors.

If the heading data is compromised, the Radar overlay may not align perfectly with the chart data.

Transmitting Radar Signals

NOTE: As a safety feature, the radar enters standby mode after it warms up. This gives you an opportunity to

verify the area around the radar is clear before beginning radar transmission.

1 With the chartplotter off, connect your radar as described in the radar installation instructions.

2 Turn on the chartplotter.

If necessary, the radar warms up and a countdown alerts you when the radar is ready.

3 Select Radar.

4 Select a radar mode.

A countdown message appears while the radar is starting up.

5 Select Options > Transmit Radar.

Stopping the Transmission of Radar Signals

From a radar screen, select Options > Radar To Standby.

TIP: Press > Radar To Standby from any screen to quickly stop radar transmission.

Setting Up the Timed Transmit Mode

To help conserve power, you can set up time intervals in which the radar will transmit and not transmit (standby)

signal transmissions.

NOTE: This feature is not available in dual radar modes.

1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > Timed Transmit.

2 Select Timed Transmit to enable the option.

3 Select Stdby Time, enter the time interval between radar signal transmissions, and select Done.

4 Select Transmit Time, enter the duration of each radar signal transmission, and select Done.

Enabling and Adjusting a Radar No Transmit Zone

You can indicate areas within which the radar scanner does not transmit signals.

NOTE: GMR Fantom and xHD2 radar models support two no-transmit zones. Most other GMR radar models

support one no-transmit zone. GMR 18 HD+ radar models do not support no-transmit zones.

1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Setup > Installation > No Transmit Zone.

The no-transmit zone is indicated by a shaded area on the radar screen.

2 Select Angle 1, and select the new location for the first angle.

3 Select Angle 2, and select the new location for the second angle.

4 Select Done.

5 If necessary, repeat for the second zone.

Radar 97

Adjusting the Radar Range

The range of the radar signal indicates the length of the pulsed signal transmitted and received by the radar.

As the range increases, the radar transmits longer pulses in order to reach distant targets. Closer targets,

especially rain and waves, also reflect the longer pulses, which can add noise to the Radar screen. Viewing

information about longer-range targets can also decrease the amount of space available on the Radar screen

for viewing information about shorter-range targets.

• Select to decrease the range.

• Select to increase the range.

Tips for Selecting a Radar Range

• Determine what information you need to see on the Radar screen.

For example, do you need information about nearby weather conditions or targets and traffic, or are you more

concerned about distant weather conditions?

• Assess the environmental conditions where the radar is being used.

Especially in inclement weather, longer-range radar signals can increase the clutter on the Radar screen and

make it more difficult to view information about shorter-range targets. In rain, shorter-range radar signals can

enable you to view information about nearby objects more effectively, if the rain clutter setting is configured

optimally.

• Select the shortest effective range, given your reason for using radar and the present environmental

conditions.

MotionScope

™

Doppler Radar Technology

The GMR Fantom radar uses the Doppler effect to detect and highlight moving targets to help you avoid

potential collisions, find flocks of birds, and track weather formations. The Doppler effect is the frequency shift

in the radar echo due to the relative motion of the target. This allows for instant detection of any targets moving

toward or away from the radar.

The MotionScope feature highlights the moving targets on the radar display so you can navigate around other

boats or severe weather, or toward fishing spots where birds are feeding at the surface.

The moving targets are color-coded so you can tell at a glance which targets are moving toward or away from

you. On most color schemes, green indicates the target is moving away from you and red indicates the target is

moving toward you.

On some models, you can also adjust the M-Scope Sensitivity setting to change the speed threshold for target

highlighting. A higher setting highlights slower targets, and a lower setting highlights only faster targets.

Enabling a Guard Zone

You can enable a guard zone to alert you when anything comes within a specified area around your boat.

From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > Guard Zone.

98 Radar

Defining a Circular Guard Zone

Before you can define the boundaries of the guard zone, you must enable a guard zone (Enabling a Guard Zone,

page98).

You can define a circular guard zone that completely surrounds your boat.

1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > Guard Zone > .

2 Select Circle.

3 Select the location of the outer guard zone circle.

4 Select the location of the inner guard zone circle to define the width of the guard zone.

Defining a Partial Guard Zone

You can define the boundaries of a guard zone that does not completely surround your boat.

1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > Guard Zone > .

2 Drag the cursor to the location of the outer guard-zone corner .

3 Select Corner 2.

4 Drag the cursor to the location of the inner guard-zone corner to define the width of the guard zone.

5 Select Done.

MARPA

WARNING

This feature is intended to enhance situational awareness and may not prevent collisions in all circumstances.

You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel and for remaining aware of obstacles or

hazards in or around the water. Failure to do so could result in an accident causing property damage, serious

personal injury, or death.

Mini-automatic radar plotting aid (MARPA) enables you to identify and track targets and is primarily used for

collision avoidance. To use MARPA, you assign a MARPA tag to a target. The radar system automatically tracks

the tagged object and provides you with information about the object, including the range, bearing, speed, GPS

heading, nearest approach, and time to nearest approach. MARPA indicates the status of each tagged object

(acquiring, lost, tracking, or dangerous), and the chartplotter can sound a collision alarm if the object enters your

safe zone.

Before you can use MARPA, you must have a heading sensor connected and an active GPS signal. The heading

sensor must provide the NMEA 2000 parameter group number (PGN) 127250 or the NMEA 0183 HDM or HDG

output sentence.

Radar 99

MARPA Targeting Symbols

Acquiring a target. Concentric, dashed green rings radiate from the target while the radar is locking

onto it.

Target has been acquired. A solid green ring indicates the location of a target that the radar has

locked onto. A dashed green line attached to the circle indicates the projected course over ground or

the GPS heading of the target.

Dangerous target is in range. A red ring flashes from the target while an alarm sounds and a message

banner appears. After the alarm has been acknowledged, a solid red dot with a dashed red line

attached to it indicates the location and the projected course over ground or the GPS heading of the

target. If the safe-zone collision alarm has been set to Off, the target flashes, but the audible alarm

does not sound and the alarm banner does not appear.

Target has been lost. A solid green ring with an X through it indicates that the radar could not lock

onto the target.

Closest point of approach and time to closest point of approach to a dangerous target.

Acquiring MARPA Targets Automatically

You can acquire MARPA targets automatically based on MotionScope, guard zones, or boundaries.

1 From a radar screen, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels > MARPA > Auto Acquire.

2 Select , and adjust additional settings (optional).

Removing MARPA Targets Automatically

You can enable the MARPA Auto Remove setting to remove lost targets from the target list automatically. While

enabled, lost targets are removed when new targets are acquired while the target list is at full capacity.

1 From a radar screen, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels > MARPA.

2 Select Auto Remove > On.

Assigning a MARPA Tag to an Object

Before you can use MARPA, you must have a heading sensor connected and an active GPS signal. The heading

sensor must provide the NMEA 2000 parameter group number (PGN) 127250 or the NMEA 0183 HDM or HDG

output sentence.

1 From a radar screen, select an object or location.

2 Select Acquire Tgt. > MARPA Target.

Removing a MARPA Tag from a Targeted Object

1 From the Radar screen, select a MARPA target.

2 Select MARPA Target > Remove.

Viewing Information about a MARPA-tagged Object

You can view the range, bearing, speed, and other information about a MARPA-tagged object.

1 From a radar screen, select a targeted object.

2 Select MARPA Target.

100 Radar

Viewing a List of AIS and MARPA Threats

From any Radar screen or the Radar overlay, you can view and customize the appearance of a list of AIS and

MARPA threats.

1 From a Radar screen, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels.

2 Select an option:

• To view a list of AIS threats, select AIS > AIS List.

• To view a list of MARPA threats, select MARPA > MARPA List.

3 If necessary, select Display Options > Show, and select the type of threats to include in the list.

Showing AIS Vessels on the Radar Screen

AIS requires the use of an external AIS device and active transponder signals from other vessels.

You can configure how other vessels appear on the Radar screen. If any setting (except the AIS display range)

is configured for one radar mode, the setting is applied to every other radar mode. The details and projected

heading settings configured for one radar mode are applied to every other radar mode and to the Radar overlay.

1 From a Radar screen or the Radar overlay, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels > AIS.

2 Select an option:

• To indicate the distance from your location within which AIS vessels appear, select Display Range, and

select a distance.

• To show details about AIS-activated vessels, select Details > Show.

• To set the projected heading time for AIS-activated vessels, select Proj. Heading, and enter the time.

• To show the tracks of AIS vessels, select Trails, and select the length of the track that appears.

VRM and EBL

The variable range marker (VRM) and the electronic bearing line (EBL) measure the distance and bearing from

your boat to a target object. On the Radar screen, the VRM appears as a circle that is centered on the present

location of your boat, and the EBL appears as a line that begins at the present location of your boat and

intersects the VRM. The point of intersection is the target of the VRM and the EBL.

Showing and Adjusting the VRM and the EBL

You can adjust the diameter of the VRM and the angle of the EBL, which moves the intersection point of the

VRM and the EBL. The VRM and the EBL configured for one mode are applied to all other radar modes.

1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > VRM/EBL > .

2 Select a new location for the intersection point of the VRM and the EBL

3 Select Done.

Measuring the Range and Bearing to a Target Object

Before you can adjust the VRM and the EBL, you must show them on the Radar screen (Showing and Adjusting

the VRM and the EBL, page101).

1 From a Radar screen, select the target location.

2 Select Measure.

The range and the bearing to the target location appear in the upper-left corner of the screen.

Radar 101

Echo Trails

The echo trails feature enables you to track the movement of vessels on the radar display. As a vessel moves,

you can see a faint trail of the vessel's wake. You can change the length of time the trail is displayed.

NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the settings configured for use in one radar mode may or may not be

applied to other radar modes or to the radar overlay.

NOTE: This feature is not available on xHD open array or HD/HD+ radome models.

Turning on Echo Trails

From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > Echo Trails > Display.

Adjusting the Length of the Echo Trails

1 From a radar screen or the radar overlay, select Options > Radar Options > Echo Trails > Time.

2 Select the length of the trail.

Clearing the Echo Trails

You can remove the echo trails from the radar screen to reduce the clutter on the screen.

From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > Echo Trails > Clear Trails.

Radar Settings

NOTE: Not all options and settings are available on all radar and chartplotter models.

NOTE: You can optimize the radar display for each radar mode.

Radar Gain

Adjusting Gain on the Radar Screen Automatically

The automatic gain setting for each radar mode is optimized for that mode, and may differ from the automatic

gain setting used for another mode.

NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the gain setting configured for use in one radar mode may or may not

be applied to other radar modes or to the Radar overlay.

NOTE: Not all options are available on all radar models.

1 From a radar screen or the radar overlay, select Options > Gain.

2 Select an option:

• To adjust the gain automatically for changing conditions, select Auto Low or Auto High.

• To adjust the gain automatically to show birds over the surface of the water, select Auto Bird.

NOTE: This option is not available on xHD open array or HD/HD+ radome models.

102 Radar

Adjusting Gain on the Radar Screen Manually

For optimal radar performance, you can manually adjust the gain.

NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the gain setting configured for use in one radar mode may or may not

be applied to other radar modes or to the Radar overlay.

1 From a Radar screen or the Radar overlay, select Options > Gain.

2 Select Up to raise the gain, until light speckles appear across the Radar screen.

Data on the Radar screen is refreshed every few seconds. As a result, the effects of manually adjusting the

gain may not appear instantly. Adjust the gain slowly.

3 Select Down to lower the gain until the speckles disappear.

4 If boats, land, or other targets are within range, select Down to lower the gain until the targets begin to blink.

5 Select Up to raise the gain until the boats, land, or other targets appear steadily lit on the Radar screen.

6 Minimize the appearance of nearby large objects, if necessary.

7 Minimize the appearance of side-lobe echoes, if necessary.

Minimizing Nearby Large-Object Interference

Nearby targets of significant size, such as jetty walls, can cause a very bright image of the target to appear on

the Radar screen. This image can obscure smaller targets located near it.

NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the gain setting configured for use in one radar mode may or may not

be applied to other radar modes or to the Radar overlay.

1 From a Radar screen or the Radar overlay, select Options > Gain.

2 Select Down to lower the gain until the smaller targets are clearly visible on the Radar screen.

Reducing the gain to eliminate nearby large-object interference may cause smaller or distant targets to blink

or disappear from the Radar screen.

Minimizing Side-Lobe Interference on the Radar Screen

Side-lobe interference may appear to streak outward from a target in a semi-circular pattern. Side-lobe effects

can be avoided by reducing the gain or reducing the radar range.

NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the gain setting configured for use in one radar mode may or may not

be applied to other radar modes or to the Radar overlay.

1 From a Radar screen or the Radar overlay, select Options > Gain.

2 Select Down to lower the gain until the semi-circular, streaked pattern disappears from the Radar screen.

Reducing the gain to eliminate side-lobe interference may cause smaller or distant targets to blink or

disappear from the Radar screen.

Radar 103

Radar Filter Settings

Adjusting Sea Clutter on the Radar Screen

You can adjust the appearance of clutter caused by choppy sea conditions. The sea clutter setting affects the

appearance of nearby clutter and targets more than it affects the appearance of distant clutter and targets. A

higher sea clutter setting reduces the appearance of clutter caused by nearby waves, but it can also reduce or

eliminate the appearance of nearby targets.

NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the sea clutter setting configured for use in one radar mode may or

may not be applied to other radar modes or to the radar overlay.

NOTE: Not all options and settings are available on all radar and chartplotter models.

1 From a radar screen or the radar overlay, select Options > Radar Filters > Sea Clutter.

2 Select an option:.

• Select an Auto option based on the sea conditions.

• Select Up or Down to adjust the appearance of sea clutter until other targets are clearly visible on the

radar screen. Select a setting that reflects the present sea conditions.

Clutter caused by sea conditions may still be visible.

When using a compatible radar model, the chartplotter adjusts the sea clutter based on the sea conditions

automatically.

Adjusting Rain Clutter on the Radar Screen

You can adjust the appearance of clutter caused by rain. Reducing the radar range also can minimize rain clutter

(Adjusting the Radar Range, page98).

The rain clutter setting affects the appearance of nearby rain clutter and targets more than it affects the

appearance of distant rain clutter and targets. A higher rain clutter setting reduces the appearance of clutter

caused by nearby rain, but it can also reduce or eliminate the appearance of nearby targets.

NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the rain clutter settings configured for use in one radar mode may or

may not be applied to other radar modes or to the radar overlay.

1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Filters > Rain Clutter.

2 Select Up or Down to decrease or increase the appearance of nearby rain clutter until other targets are

clearly visible on the radar screen.

Clutter caused by rain may still be visible.

Averaging Multiple Scans on the Radar Screen

You can average the results of multiple scans on the radar screen. This can be an effective method to filter out

noise and enhances the detection of consistent targets. Averaging is most effective when using a longer range.

1 From a radar screen or the radar overlay, select Options > Radar Filters > Scan Average.

2 Select an option.

The High setting filters out the most noise.

104 Radar

Radar Options Menu

From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options.

MotionScope™: Uses the Doppler effect to detect and highlight moving targets to help you avoid potential

collisions, find flocks of birds, and track weather formations (MotionScope

™

Doppler Radar Technology,

page98). This option is only available on Fantom models.

Pulse Exp.: Increases the duration of the transmit pulse, which helps maximize the energy directed toward

targets. This helps to enhance the detection and identification of targets. This option is only available on xHD

radome and xHD2 open array models.

Target Size: Adjusts the size of targets, by adjusting the pulse compression processing. Select smaller targets

for a sharp, high resolution radar image. Select larger targets to display larger echos for point targets, like

boats and buoys. This option is only available on Fantom models.

Echo Trails: Enables you to track the movement of vessels on the radar screen. This option is not available on

xHD open array or HD/HD+ radome models.

VRM/EBL: Shows the variable range marker (VRM) circle and the electronic bearing line (EBL) to allow you to

measure the distance and bearing from your boat to a target object (VRM and EBL, page101).

Guard Zone: Sets a safe zone around your boat and sounds an alarm when anything enters the zone (Enabling a

Guard Zone, page98).

Timed Transmit: Helps conserve power by transmitting radar signals at set intervals.

Radar Setup Menu

From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Setup.

Source: Selects the radar source when more than one radar is connected to the network.

Chart Display: Shows the chart under the radar image. When enabled, the Layers menu appears.

Orientation: Sets the perspective of the radar display.

Crosstalk Rej.: Reduces the appearance of clutter caused by interference from another nearby radar source.

Rotation Spd.: Sets the preferred speed at which the radar rotates. The High Speed option can be used to

increase the refresh rate. In some situations, the radar automatically rotates at the normal speed to improve

detection, for example, when a longer range is selected or when MotionScope or Dual range is used.

Appearance: Sets the color scheme, look-ahead speed, and navigation appearance.

Installation: Allows you to configure the radar for the installation, such as setting the front of the boat and the

antenna park position.

Reducing Cross Talk Clutter on the Radar Screen

You can reduce the appearance of clutter caused by interference from another nearby radar source, when the

cross talk reject setting is on.

NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the cross talk reject setting configured for use in one radar mode may

or may not be applied to other radar modes or to the Radar overlay.

From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Setup > Crosstalk Rej..

Radar Appearance Settings

From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Setup > Appearance.

NOTE: These settings do not apply to the radar overlay.

Bkgd. Color: Sets the color for the background.

Frgd. Color: Sets the color scheme for the radar returns.

Brightness: Sets the brightness of various radar features, such as range rings and tracking symbols.

Look-Ahead Speed: Shifts your present location toward the bottom of the screen automatically as your speed

increases. Enter your top speed for the best results.

Radar 105

Radar Installation Settings

Front of Boat: Compensates for the physical location of the radar when it is not on the boat axis (Measuring and

Setting the Front-of-Boat Offset, page106).

Antenna Configuration: Sets the radar antenna size and sets the position in which the radar stops (Setting a

Custom Park Position, page106).

No Transmit Zone: Sets the area in which the radar does not transmit signals (Enabling and Adjusting a Radar

No Transmit Zone, page97).

Measuring and Setting the Front-of-Boat Offset

The front-of-boat offset compensates for the physical location of the radar scanner on a boat, if the radar

scanner does not align with the bow-stern axis. The front-of-boat offset setting configured for use in one radar

mode is applied to every other radar mode and to the radar overlay.

1 Using a magnetic compass, take an optical bearing of a stationary target located within viewable range.

2 Measure the target bearing on the radar.

3 If the bearing deviation is more than +/- 1 degree, set the front-of-boat offset.

4 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Setup > Installation > Front of Boat.

5 Select Up or Down to adjust the offset.

Setting a Custom Park Position

By default, the antenna is stopped perpendicular to the pedestal when it is not spinning. You can adjust this

position.

1 From the radar screen, select Options > Radar Setup > Installation > Antenna Configuration > Park Position.

2 Use the slider bar to adjust the position of the antenna when stopped, and select Back.

Radar My Vessel Layer Settings

From a radar screen, select Options > Layers > My Vessel.

Heading Line: Shows an extension from the bow of the boat in the direction of travel on the radar screen.

Range Rings: Shows the range rings that help you to visualize distances on the radar screen.

Bearing Ring: Shows a bearing relative to your heading or based on a north reference, to help you determine the

bearing to an object shown on the radar screen.

Selecting a Different Radar Source

1 Select an option:

• From a radar screen or the radar overlay, select Options > Radar Setup > Source.

• Select Settings > Communications > Preferred Sources > Radar.

2 Select the radar source.

106 Radar

Autopilot

WARNING

You can use the autopilot feature only at a station installed next to a helm, throttle, and helm control device.

You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The autopilot is a tool that enhances your

capability to operate your boat. It does not relieve you of the responsibility of safely operating your boat. Avoid

navigational hazards and never leave the helm unattended.

Always be prepared to promptly regain manual control of your boat.

Learn to operate the autopilot on calm and hazard-free open water.

Use caution when operating the autopilot near hazards in the water, such as docks, pilings, and other boats.

The autopilot system continuously adjusts the steering of your boat to maintain a constant heading (heading

hold). The system also allows manual steering and several modes of automatic-steering functions and patterns.

When the chartplotter is connected to a compatible Garmin autopilot system, you can engage and control the

autopilot from the chartplotter. For information about compatible Garmin autopilot systems, go to garmin.com.

When the chartplotter is connected to a compatible Yamaha

autopilot system, you can control the autopilot

from the chartplotter using the Yamaha autopilot screen and overlay bar (Yamaha Autopilot, page113). For

information about compatible Yamaha autopilot systems, contact your Yamaha dealer.

Autopilot Configuration

NOTICE

To avoid damage to your boat, the autopilot system should be installed and configured by a qualified marine

installer. Specific knowledge of marine steering and electrical systems is required for proper installation and

configuration.

The autopilot system must be configured to work properly with your boat. You can configure the autopilot

using a chartplotter on the same NMEA 2000 network as the autopilot. For configuration instructions, go to

support.garmin.com, and download the configuration guide for your specific autopilot model.

Selecting the Preferred Heading Source

NOTICE

For best results, use the autopilot CCU internal compass for the heading source. Using a third-party GPS

compass can cause the data to be delivered erratically and may result in excessive delays. The autopilot needs

timely information, and therefore cannot often use third-party GPS compass data for GPS location or speed.

If a third-party GPS compass is used, the autopilot will likely report loss of navigation data and speed source

periodically.

If you have more than one heading source on the network, you can select a your preferred source. The source

could be a compatible GPS compass or a magnetic heading sensor.

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Preferred Sources

2 Select a source.

If the selected heading source is unavailable, the autopilot screen does not display any data.

Opening the Autopilot Screen

Before you can open the autopilot screen, you must have a compatible Garmin autopilot installed and

configured.

Select Vessel > Autopilot.

Autopilot 107

Autopilot Screen

Actual heading

Intended heading (heading the autopilot is steering toward)

Actual heading (when in standby mode)

Intended heading (when engaged)

Rudder position indicator (This functionality is available only when a rudder sensor is connected.)

Adjusting the Step Steering Increment

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Step Turn Size.

2 Select an increment.

Setting the Power Saver

You can adjust the level of rudder activity.

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Power Mode Setup > Power Saver.

2 Select a percentage.

Selecting a higher percentage reduces rudder activity and heading performance. The higher the percentage,

the more the course deviates before the autopilot corrects it.

TIP: In choppy conditions at low speeds, increasing the Power Saver percentage reduces rudder activity.

108 Autopilot

Enabling the Shadow Drive

™

Feature

WARNING

If the Shadow Drive feature is disabled, steering the boat manually will not disengage the autopilot system. You

must use the helm control or connected chartplotter to disengage the autopilot system.

NOTE: The Shadow Drive feature is not available on all autopilot models.

If the Shadow Drive feature has been disabled, you must enable it again before you can steer the boat manually

to disengage the autopilot system.

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Shadow Drive Setup.

2 If Disabled is shown, select Shadow Drive to enable the Shadow Drive feature.

The Shadow Drive feature is enabled. You can repeat these steps to disable the feature again.

Autopilot Overlay Bar

NOTE: Not all options are available on all autopilot models.

Autopilot status

Engages and disengages heading hold

Steers left

Actual heading

Rudder position indicator (available only when a rudder sensor is connected)

Intended heading (heading the autopilot is steering toward)

Steers right

Engages the last used steering pattern

Engages follow route mode (available only when autopilot is in standby status and navigating using Go

To, Route To, or Auto Guidance)

Opens the full autopilot screen and menu

Engaging the Autopilot

When you engage the autopilot, the autopilot takes control of the helm and steers the boat to maintain your

heading.

From any screen, select Engage.

Your intended heading shows in the center of the Autopilot screen.

Autopilot 109

Adjusting the Heading Using the Helm

NOTE: You must enable the Shadow Drive feature before you can adjust the heading using the helm while the

autopilot is engaged .

With the autopilot engaged, manually steer the boat using the helm.

Shadow Drive and at the top of the heading screen appear in yellow, and you have full steering control

using the helm.

When you release the helm and maintain a specific heading for a few seconds, the autopilot resumes a

heading hold at the new heading.

Adjusting the Heading with the Chartplotter in Step Steering Mode

1 Engage a heading hold (Engaging the Autopilot, page109).

2 Select an option:

• Select <1° or 1°> to initiate a single 1° turn.

• Select <<10° or 10°>> to initiate a single 10° turn.

• Hold <1° or 1°> to initiate a rate-controlled turn.

The boat continues to turn until you let go of the key.

• Hold <<10° or 10°>> to initiate a sequence of 10° turns.

Steering Patterns

WARNING

You are responsible for the safe operation of your boat. Do not begin a pattern until you are certain the water is

clear of obstacles.

The autopilot can steer the boat in preset patterns for fishing, and it can perform other specialty maneuvers

such as U-turns and Williamson turns.

Following the U-Turn Pattern

You can use the u-turn pattern to turn the boat around 180 degrees and maintain the new heading.

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > U-Turn.

2 Select Engage Port or Engage Starboard.

Setting Up and Following the Circles Pattern

You can use the circles pattern to steer the boat in a continuous circle, in a specified direction, and at a

specified time interval.

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > Circles.

2 If necessary, select Time, and select a time for the autopilot to steer one complete circle.

3 Select Engage Port or Engage Starboard.

Setting Up and Following the Zigzag Pattern

You can use the zigzag pattern to steer the boat from port to starboard and back, over a specified time and

angle, across your present heading.

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > Zigzag.

2 If necessary, select Amplitude, and select a degree.

3 If necessary, select Period, and select a length of time.

4 Select Engage Zigzag.

110 Autopilot

Following the Williamson Turn Pattern

You can use the Williamson turn pattern to steer the boat around with the intent of running alongside the

location where the Williamson turn pattern was initiated. The Williamson turn pattern can be used in man

overboard situations.

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > Williamson Turn.

2 Select Engage Port or Engage Starboard.

Following an Orbit Pattern

You can use the orbit pattern to steer the boat in a continuous circle around the active waypoint. The size of the

circle is defined by your distance from the active waypoint when you begin the orbit pattern.

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > Orbit.

2 Select Engage Port or Engage Starboard.

Setting Up and Following the Cloverleaf Pattern

You can use the cloverleaf pattern to steer the boat to repeatedly pass over an active waypoint. When you begin

the cloverleaf pattern, the autopilot drives the boat toward the active waypoint and begins the cloverleaf pattern.

You can adjust the distance between the waypoint and the location where the autopilot turns the boat for

another pass over the waypoint. The default setting turns the boat at a range of 1000ft. (300m) from the active

waypoint.

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > Cloverleaf.

2 If necessary, select Length, and select a distance.

3 Select Engage Port or Engage Starboard.

Setting Up and Following a Search Pattern

You can use the search pattern to steer the boat in increasingly larger circles outward from the active waypoint,

forming a spiral pattern. When you begin the search pattern, the autopilot immediately drives the boat in a circle

centered on the active waypoint and expands the spiral as it completes each circle.

You can adjust the distance between each circle in the spiral. The default distance between circles is 50ft.

(20m).

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > Search.

2 If necessary, select Search Spacing, and select a distance.

3 Select Engage Port or Engage Starboard.

Cancelling a Steering Pattern

• Physically steer the boat.

NOTE: Shadow Drive feature must be enabled to cancel a steering pattern by physically steering the boat.

• Select or to cancel a pattern using step steering mode.

• Select Standby.

Adjusting the Autopilot Response

The Response setting allows you to adjust the autopilot responsiveness for varying sea and wind conditions.

For advanced autopilot configuration, see the configuration guide included with your autopilot system.

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Response.

2 Adjust the rudder response.

If you want the rudder to be more responsive and move more quickly, increase the value. If the rudder is too

responsive and moving too quickly, decrease the value.

Autopilot 111

Enabling the Autopilot Controls on a Garmin Watch

You can control the Garmin autopilot with a compatible Garmin watch. Go to garmin.com for a list of compatible

Garmin watches.

NOTE: Smart notifications are not available on your watch when the autopilot remote control is enabled.

1 Select Communications > Wireless Devices > Connect IQ™ Apps > Autopilot Control > Enable > New

Connection.

2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Customizing the Autopilot Button Actions

Before you can set the autopilot button actions, you must install and configure a compatible Garmin autopilot.

You can select up to three autopilot actions for your Garmin watch to perform.

NOTE: Available autopilot actions depend on the autopilot installed.

1 On the chartplotter, select Communications > Wireless Devices > Connect IQ™ Apps > Autopilot Control >

Button Actions.

2 Select a button.

3 Select an action.

Controlling the Autopilot with a GRID 20 Remote Control

• Press the knob to change the mode.

• While in step steering mode, turn the knob to steer.

Each turn of the knob produces a 1-degree step turn.

• While in autopilot response mode, turn the knob to adjust the Response setting.

• While in rudder steering mode, hold the joystick to the right or left to steer.

Reactor

™

Autopilot Remote Control

WARNING

You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The autopilot is a tool that enhances your

capability to operate your boat. It does not relieve you of the responsibility of safely operating your boat. Avoid

navigational hazards and never leave the helm unattended.

You can wirelessly connect a Reactor autopilot remote control to the chartplotter to control the compatible

Reactor autopilot system.

For more information about using the remote, see the Reactor autopilot remote control instructions at

garmin.com

Pairing a Reactor Autopilot Remote Control With a Chartplotter

1 Select Options > Communications > Wireless Devices > Wireless Remotes > Autopilot Remote.

2 If necessary, select Enable.

3 Select New Connection.

4 On the remote control, select > Pair with MFD.

The chartplotter beeps and shows a confirmation message.

5 On the chartplotter, select Yes to complete the pairing process.

Changing the Functions of the Reactor Autopilot Remote Control Action Keys

You can change the patterns or actions assigned to the Reactor autopilot remote control action keys.

1 Select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices > Wireless Remotes > Autopilot Remote > Button

Actions.

2 Select an action key to change.

3 Select a pattern or action to assign to the action key.

112 Autopilot

Updating the Reactor Autopilot Remote Control Software

You can update the Reactor autopilot remote control software using the chartplotter.

1 Insert a memory card into the card slot on the computer.

2 Go to garmin.com/software/autopilot_remote_control, and select Software.

3 Select Download.

4 Read and agree to the terms.

5 Select Download.

6 Choose a location, and select Save.

7 Double-click the downloaded file.

8 Select Next.

9 Select the drive associated with the memory card, and select Next > Finish.

10 On the chartplotter, insert the memory card into the card slot.

11 Select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices > Autopilot Remote > Update Software.

Yamaha Autopilot

WARNING

You can use the autopilot feature only at a station installed next to a helm, throttle, and helm control device.

You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The autopilot is a tool that enhances your

capability to operate your boat. It does not relieve you of the responsibility of safely operating your boat. Avoid

navigational hazards and never leave the helm unattended.

Always be prepared to promptly regain manual control of your boat.

Learn to operate the autopilot on calm and hazard-free open water.

Use caution when operating the autopilot near hazards in the water, such as docks, pilings, and other boats.

The autopilot system continuously adjusts the steering of your boat to maintain a constant heading (heading

hold).

When the chartplotter is connected to a compatible Yamaha autopilot system, you can view the autopilot

information using the Yamaha autopilot screen and overlay bar. For information about compatible Yamaha

autopilot systems, contact your Yamaha dealer.

Autopilot 113

Yamaha Autopilot Screen

Actual heading

Intended heading (heading the autopilot is steering toward)

Yamaha Autopilot Settings

From a Yamaha engine screen, select Options > Autopilot Setting.

Pattern Set: Allows you to select an autopilot pattern.

Direction: Sets a port or starboard direction for the pattern.

Spacing: Sets the spacing for the pattern.

Length: Sets the length of the pattern.

Amplitude: Sets the angle for the zigzag pattern.

Initial Radius: Sets the radius of the spiral pattern.

Final Track Point Mode: Sets the mode for the autopilot when it reaches the end of a route. The FishPoint®

option maintains the position, but does not maintain the heading. The DriftPoint® option allows the boat to

drift with the wind or current while maintaining the selected heading, but does not maintain the position. The

StayPoint® option maintains the position and the heading. The Deceleration option stops the motor, but does

not maintain the position or heading. The No Deceleration option does not stop the motor.

Course Hold Offset: Sets a distance to navigate parallel to a route.

NOTE: Detailed information on the operation of the Yamaha Joystick and Autopilot system can be found in the

Quick Guide included with the latest Joystick/Autopilot kit.

114 Autopilot

Yamaha Autopilot Overlay Bar

Autopilot mode

Actual heading

Intended heading (heading the autopilot is steering toward)

Opens the full autopilot screen and menu

Force

Trolling Motor Control

WARNING

Do not run the motor when the propeller is out of the water. Contact with the rotating propeller may result in

severe injury.

Do not use the motor in areas where you or other people in the water may come into contact with the rotating

propeller.

Always disconnect the motor from the battery before cleaning or servicing the propeller to avoid injury.

You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The autopilot features on the trolling

motor are tools that enhance your capability to operate your boat. They do not relieve you of the responsibility

of safely operating your boat. Avoid navigational hazards and never leave the motor controls unattended.

Learn to operate the autopilot on calm and hazard-free open water.

Use caution when operating the autopilot near hazards in the water, such as docks, pilings, and other boats.

CAUTION

When using the autopilot features, be prepared for sudden stops, acceleration, and turns.

When stowing or deploying the motor, be aware of slick surfaces around the motor. Slipping when stowing or

deploying the motor may result in injury.

You can connect the Force trolling motor to the chartplotter to view and control the motor using the chartplotter.

Connecting to a Trolling Motor

You can connect the chartplotter wirelessly to a compatible Garmin Force trolling motor on your boat to control

the trolling motor from the chartplotter.

1 Turn on the chartplotter and the trolling motor.

2 Enable the Wi‑Fi network on the chartplotter (Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network, page26).

3 If multiple chartplotters are connected on the Garmin Marine Network, make sure this chartplotter is the host

of the Wi‑Fi network (Changing the Wi‑Fi Host, page27).

4 On the chartplotter, select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices > Garmin Trolling Motor.

5 On the trolling motor display panel, press three times to enter pairing mode.

on the trolling motor display panel is solid blue as it searches for a connection to the chartplotter, and

turns green when the connection is successful.

After the chartplotter and trolling motor connect successfully, enable the trolling motor overlay bar to control

the motor (Adding the Trolling Motor Controls to Screens, page116).

Force

Trolling Motor Control 115

Adding the Trolling Motor Controls to Screens

After you have connected the chartplotter to the Force trolling motor, you must add the trolling motor control

bar to screens to control the trolling motor.

1 Open a screen from which you would like to control the trolling motor.

2 Select an option:

• From a combination page or SmartMode layout, select Options > Edit > Overlays.

• From a full screen, select Options > Edit Overlays.

3 Select Top Bar or Bottom Bar.

4 Select Trolling Motor Bar.

Repeat these steps to add the trolling motor controls to all of the screens from which you would like to control

the trolling motor.

Trolling Motor Control Bar

The trolling motor control bar allows you to control a Force trolling motor and see the status of the motor.

Select an item to engage it. The button illuminates when selected. Select the item again to disengage it.

Trolling motor battery status.

Turns the propeller on and off.

Reduces the speed.

Speed indicator.

Increases the speed.

Enables the cruise control at the current speed over ground (SOG).

Engages the propellor at full speed.

Trolling motor status.

Enables anchor lock, which uses the trolling motor to hold your position.

Steers the trolling motor.

When in anchor lock, jogs the anchor lock position forward, backward, left, or right.

Enables heading hold (set and maintain the current heading).

When the trolling motor is in heading hold, an autopilot bar appears in the trolling motor bar.

Opens the trolling motor settings.

116 Force

Trolling Motor Control

Trolling Motor Settings

From the trolling motor bar, select .

Calibrate: Calibrates the trolling motor compass (Calibrating the Trolling Motor Compass, page117) and sets

the trolling motor bow offset (Setting the Bow Offset, page118).

Anchor Gain: Sets the response of the trolling motor when in anchor lock mode. If you need the trolling motor

to be more responsive and move quicker, increase the value. If the motor is moving too much, decrease the

value.

Navigation Gain: Sets the response of the trolling motor when navigating. If you need the trolling motor to be

more responsive and move quicker, increase the value. If the motor is moving too much, decrease the value.

Heading Hold Mode: Sets the heading hold mode. The Vessel Align option attempts to keep the boat pointing in

the same direction regardless of drift. The Go To option attempts to navigate a straight line in the requested

direction.

Arrival Mode: Sets the behavior of the trolling motor when you reach the end of a route. With the Anchor Lock

setting, the trolling motor holds the position using the anchor lock feature when the boat reaches the end of

the route. With the Manual setting, the propeller turns off when the boat reaches the end of the route.

CAUTION

You are responsible for the safe operation of your boat. When using the Manual setting for the Arrival Mode

option, you must be ready to take control of the boat.

Auto Power On: Turns on the trolling motor when you apply power to the system.

Prop. Stow Side: Sets which side of the trolling motor the propellor rotates to when stowing the trolling motor.

This is helpful when you store other items near the stowed propellor.

Shortcut Keys: Enables the shortcut keys on the trolling motor remote control to work with this particular

chartplotter. The keys work with only one chartplotter at a time.

Restore Defaults: Resets the trolling motor settings to the factory default values.

Assigning a Shortcut to the Trolling Motor Remote Control Shortcut Keys

You can quickly open commonly used screens by assigning a shortcut key on the trolling motor remote control.

You can create a shortcut to screens, such as sonar screens and charts.

NOTE: If you have more than one chartplotter on the network, you can assign shortcut keys to one chartplotter

only.

1 Open a screen.

2 Hold a shortcut key.

TIP: The shortcut is also saved to the Pinned category with the shortcut key number.

Calibrating the Trolling Motor Compass

You must calibrate the compass in the trolling motor before you can use the autopilot features.

1 Drive the boat to an open area of calm water.

2 From the trolling motor bar, select > Calibrate > Compass Cal..

3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Force

Trolling Motor Control 117

Setting the Bow Offset

Based on the installation angle, the trolling motor may not align with the center line of your boat. For the best

results, you should set the bow offset.

1 Adjust the angle of the trolling motor so it aligns with the center line of your boat , pointing straight

forward.

2 From the trolling motor bar, select > Calibrate > Bow Offset.

Digital Selective Calling

Networked Chartplotter and VHF Radio Functionality

If you have a NMEA 0183 VHF radio or a NMEA 2000 VHF radio connected to your chartplotter, these features

are enabled.

• The chartplotter can transfer your GPS position to your radio. If your radio is capable, GPS position

information is transmitted with DSC calls.

• The chartplotter can receive digital selective calling (DSC) distress and position information from the radio.

• The chartplotter can track the positions of vessels sending position reports.

If you have a Garmin NMEA 2000 VHF radio connected to your chartplotter, these features are also enabled.

• The chartplotter allows you to quickly set up and send individual routine call details to your Garmin VHF

radio.

• When you initiate a man-overboard distress call from your radio, the chartplotter shows the man-overboard

screen and prompts you to navigate to the man-overboard point.

• When you initiate a man-overboard distress call from your chartplotter, the radio shows the Distress Call page

to initiate a man-overboard distress call.

For information about installing and connecting a VHF radio, see the VHF radio installation instructions.

Turning On DSC

Select Settings > Other Vessels > DSC.

DSC List

The DSC list is a log of the most recent DSC calls and other DSC contacts you have entered. The DSC list can

contain up to 100 entries. The DSC list shows the most recent call from a boat. If a second call is received from

the same boat, it replaces the first call in the call list.

118 Digital Selective Calling

Viewing the DSC List

Before you can view the DSC list, the chartplotter must be connected to a VHF radio that supports DSC.

Select Info > Other Vessels > DSC List.

Adding a DSC Contact

You can add a vessel to your DSC list. You can make calls to a DSC contact from the chartplotter.

1 Select Info > Other Vessels > DSC List > Add Contact.

2 Enter the Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) of the vessel.

3 Enter the name of the vessel.

Incoming Distress Calls

If your compatible chartplotter and VHF radio are connected using NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000, your chartplotter

alerts you when your VHF radio receives a DSC distress call. If position information was sent with the distress

call, that information is also available and recorded with the call.

designates a distress call in the DSC list and marks the position of the vessel on the Navigation chart at the

time of the DSC distress call.

Navigating to a Vessel in Distress

designates a distress call in the DSC list and marks the position of a vessel on the Navigation chart at the

time of the DSC distress call.

1 Select Info > Other Vessels > DSC List.

2 Select a position-report call.

3 Select Review > Navigate To.

4 Select Go To or Route To.

Man-Overboard Distress Calls Initiated from a VHF Radio

When the chartplotter is connected to a compatible VHF radio with NMEA 2000, and you initiate a man-

overboard DSC distress call from the radio, the chartplotter shows the man-overboard screen and prompts you

to navigate to the man-overboard point. If you have a compatible autopilot system connected to the network,

the chartplotter prompts you to start a Williamson’s turn to the man-overboard point.

If you cancel the man-overboard distress call on the radio, the chartplotter screen prompting you to activate

navigation to the man-overboard location disappears.

Man-Overboard and SOS Distress Calls Initiated from the Chartplotter

When your chartplotter is connected to a Garmin NMEA 2000 compatible radio and you mark an SOS or

man-overboard location, the radio shows the Distress Call page so you can quickly initiate a distress call.

For information on placing distress calls from your radio, see the VHF radio owner’s manual. For information

about marking an MOB or SOS location, see Marking a Man Overboard (MOB) Location, page51.

Position Tracking

When you connect the chartplotter to a VHF radio using NMEA 0183, you can track vessels that send position

reports.

This feature is also available with NMEA 2000, when the vessel sends the correct PGN data (PGN 129808; DSC

Call Information).

Every position report call received is logged in the DSC list (DSC List, page118).

Digital Selective Calling 119

Viewing a Position Report

1 Select Info > Other Vessels > DSC List.

2 Select a position-report call.

3 Select Review.

4 Select an option:

• To view the position report details, select .

• To view to a chart marking the location, select .

Navigating to a Tracked Vessel

1 Select Info > Other Vessels > DSC List.

2 Select a position-report call.

3 Select Review > Navigate To.

4 Select Go To or Route To.

Creating a Waypoint at the Position of a Tracked Vessel

1 Select Info > Other Vessels > DSC List.

2 Select a position-report call.

3 Select Review > Create Waypoint.

Editing Information in a Position Report

1 Select Info > Other Vessels > DSC List.

2 Select a position-report call.

3 Select Review > Edit.

• To enter the name of the vessel, select Name.

• To select a new symbol, select Symbol, if available.

• To enter a comment, select Comment.

• To show a trail line for the vessel if your radio is tracking the position of the vessel, select Trail.

• To select a color for the trail line, select Trail Line.

Deleting a Position-Report Call

1 Select Info > Other Vessels > DSC List.

2 Select a position-report call.

3 Select Review > Edit > Clear Report.

Viewing Vessel Trails on the Chart

You can view trails for all tracked vessels on some chart views. By default, a black line indicates the path of the

vessel, a black dot indicates each previously reported position of a tracked vessel, and a blue flag indicates the

last reported position of the vessel.

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels > DSC > DSC Trails.

2 Select the number of hours to show tracked vessels on the chart.

For example, if you select 4 Hours, all trail points that are less than four hours old appear for all tracked

vessels.

Individual Routine Calls

When you connect the chartplotter to a Garmin VHF radio, you can use the chartplotter interface to set up an

individual routine call.

When setting up an individual routine call from your chartplotter, you can select the DSC channel on which you

want to communicate. The radio transmits this request with your call.

120 Digital Selective Calling

Selecting a DSC Channel

NOTE: The selection of a DSC channel is limited to those channels that are available in all frequency bands. The

default channel is 72. If you select a different channel, the chartplotter uses that channel for subsequent calls

until you call using another channel.

1 Select Info > Other Vessels > DSC List.

2 Select a vessel or a station to call.

3 Select Review > Call with Radio > Channel.

4 Select an available channel.

Making an Individual Routine Call

NOTE: When initiating a call from the chartplotter, if the radio does not have an MMSI number programmed, the

radio will not receive call information.

1 Select Info > Other Vessels > DSC List.

2 Select a vessel or a station to call.

3 Select Review > Call with Radio.

4 If necessary, select Channel, and select a new channel.

5 Select Send.

The chartplotter sends information about the call to the radio.

6 On your Garmin VHF radio, complete the call.

Making an Individual Routine Call to an AIS Target

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select an AIS target.

2 Select AIS Vessel > Call with Radio.

3 If necessary, select Channel, and select a new channel.

4 Select Send.

The chartplotter sends information about the call to the radio.

5 On your Garmin VHF radio, complete the call.

Gauges and Graphs

The gauges and graphs provide various information about the engine and environment. To view the information,

a compatible transducer or sensor must be connected to the network.

Gauges and Graphs 121

Viewing the Gauges

1 Select Vessel.

2 Select a gauge, such as Vessel.

3 Select or to view a different gauge page, if applicable.

Engine Alert Icons

If an icon lights up on the gauges page, it indicates an issue with the motor.

Low oil level or oil pressure alert

Temperature alert

Battery voltage alert

Check engine alert

Changing the Data Shown in a Gauge

1 From a gauges screen, hold a gauge.

2 Select a gauge to edit.

3 Select Replace Data.

4 Select a data type.

5 Select the data to display.

122 Gauges and Graphs

Customizing the Gauges

You can add a gauge page, change the layout of the gauge page, change how the gauges are displayed, and

change the data in each gauge.

1 Open a gauge page.

2 Select Options > Edit Gauge Pages.

3 If necessary, select a gauge view or gauge to edit.

4 Select an option:

• To change the data shown in a gauge, select the gauge and select Replace Data.

• To change the layout of the gauges on the page, select Change Layout.

• To add a page to this set of gauge pages, select Add Page.

• To remove a page from this set of gauge pages, select Remove Page.

• To change the order of this page in the set of gauge pages, select Move Page Left or Move Page Right.

• To restore this page to the original view, select Restore Default View.

Customizing Engine Gauge and Fuel Gauge Limits

You can configure the upper and lower limits and the range of desired standard operation of a gauge.

NOTE: Not all options are available for all gauges.

1 From an applicable gauges screen, select Options > Installation > Set Gauge Limits.

2 Select a gauge to customize.

3 Select an option:

• To set the minimum value of the standard operating range, select Rated Min..

• To set the maximum value of the standard operating range, select Rated Max..

• To set the lower limit of the gauge lower than the rated minimum, select Scale Min..

• To set the upper limit of the gauge higher than the rated maximum, select Scale Max..

4 Select the limit value.

5 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set additional gauge limits.

Selecting the Number of Engines Shown in Gauges

You can show information for up to four engines.

1 From the engine gauges screen, select Options > Installation > Engine Selection > Num. Engines.

2 Select an option:

• Select the number of engines.

• Select Auto Configure to automatically detect the number of engines.

Customizing the Engines Shown in Gauges

Before you can customize how the engines are shown in the gauges, you must manually select the number of

engines (Selecting the Number of Engines Shown in Gauges, page123).

1 From the engine gauges screen, select Options > Installation > Engine Selection > Num. Engines.

2 Select First Engine.

3 Select the engine to display in the first gauge.

4 Repeat for the remaining engine bars.

Enabling Status Alarms for Engine Gauges

You can enable the chartplotter to display engine status alarms.

From the engine gauges screen, select Options > Installation > Status Alarms > On.

When an engine alarms is triggered, a gauge status alarm message appears and the gauge may become red

depending on the type of alarm.

Gauges and Graphs 123

Enabling Some Engine Gauge Status Alarms

1 From the engine gauges screen, select Options > Installation > Status Alarms > Custom.

2 Select one or more engine gauge alarms to turn on or off.

Yamaha Engine Gauges

Select Vessel > YAMAHA to view the Yamaha engine gauges. This screen varies based on the engine network

and throttle controller.

124 Gauges and Graphs

Data fields

Hold to replace the data.

Current time

Hold to view trip data.

Select to toggle the autopilot bar on and off (Helm Master

EX).

Select to set the joystick button for Set Point functions (Helm Master).

Tank level information

Hold a tank to view detailed tank level sensor information.

Status icons

GPS signal strength (Helm Master)

Select to set the Fish Point settings (Helm Master/Helm Master EX).

Select to set the trolling speed (Helm Master/Helm Master EX/Mechanical RC/Digital Electronic RC

(6X6/6X7)).

Data fields

Hold to replace the data.

Shift position

Tachometer and trim angle

Hold to change the background.

Engine information

Hold to replace the data and change the gauge appearance.

Engine Condition Icons

Orange icons indicate engine conditions.

Yamaha security system is on.

Engines are under synchronization control.

Engines are warming up.

Gauges and Graphs 125

Engine Alert Icons

Red icons indicate engine abnormalities.

NOTICE

Consult your Yamaha dealer if the problem cannot be located and corrected.

Low cooling water pressure.

Low oil pressure.

Stop the engine. Check the engine oil level, and add more oil if necessary.

NOTICE

Do not continue to run the engine if this indicator is on. Serious engine damage will occur.

Engine overheating.

Stop the engine immediately. Check the cooling water inlet, and clear it if it is blocked.

NOTICE

Do not continue to run the engine if this indicator is on. Serious engine damage will occur.

Low battery voltage.

Check the battery and battery connections, and tighten all loose battery connections.

Return to port soon if tightening the battery connections does not increase the battery voltage. Consult

your Yamaha dealer immediately.

NOTE: Do NOT stop the engine when this alert is on. If you do, you may not be able to restart the

engine.

Water in the fuel.

Water has collected in the fuel filter (fuel separator).

Stop the engine immediately and consult the engine manual to drain the water from the fuel filter.

NOTE: Gasoline mixed with water might cause damage to the engine.

Check engine/maintenance alert.

Consult your Yamaha dealer immediately. The check engine alert also appears when more than 100

hours have elapsed since the previous maintenance.

Engine alert notification. (Helm Master)

Engine emission issue.

Setting Up the Gauges

Configuring the Number of Engines

1 From a gauges screen, select Options > Num. Engines.

2 Select the number of engines.

126 Gauges and Graphs

Configuring the Tank Level Sensors

1 From a gauges screen, select Options > Tank Preset.

2 Select a tank level sensor to configure.

3 Select Name, enter a name, and select Done.

4 Select Type, and select the type of sensor.

5 Select Style, and select the style of sensor.

6 Select Tank Capacity, enter the capacity of the tank, and select Done.

7 Select Calibration, and follow the on-screen instructions to calibrate the tank levels.

If you do not calibrate the tank levels, the system uses default settings for the tank levels.

Changing the Data Shown

1 From a data screen, hold a customizable item.

2 Select a data type.

3 Select the data to display.

Yamaha Engine Data Settings

NOTICE

Be sure the settings are set correctly. If not, the engine screen will not display the correct information.

From a Yamaha engine screen, select Options.

Trip: Displays information about the trip, such as distance and hours, and allows you to reset these values.

Maintenance Reminder: Displays maintenance information, enables you to set the maintenance intervals, and

allows you to reset the time elapsed since the previous maintenance.

Tank Preset: Sets the tank name, fluid type, sensor style, and tank capacity, and calibrates the sensor.

Trim Assist: Turns the trim assist feature on or off. Available on the Helm Master system equipped with a digital

engine control (DEC) system.

Steer Friction: Sets the friction on the steering wheel. The friction adjusts automatically according to the engine

speed. Available on the Helm Master system equipped with a digital engine control (DEC) system.

Lock to Lock: Sets the number of times the steering wheel can be turned between locks, fully to port and fully to

starboard.

Speed Control: Sets the speed source to GPS or RPM. Using GPS as the Speed Source is available only with

the Helm Master EX system equipped with an autopilot or joystick. GPS is not available on the Helm Master

system.

Autopilot Setting: Configures the Yamaha autopilot settings. Available on the Helm Master EX system equipped

with an autopilot. For Garmin autopilot information, see (Autopilot, page107).

Joystick and Set Point: Sets the joystick thrust, trim angle and preset, fine tuning distance, and fish point

settings. Available on the Helm Master system and the Helm Master EX system equipped with a joystick.

Trim Assist Preset: Sets up the trim assist presets. Available on the Helm Master system equipped with a

digital engine control (DEC) system.

Fuel Flow Offset: Sets the offset for the fuel flow data.

Off Timer: Turns off the system one hour after the engine is turned off.

Battery Management: Configures the battery management system, such as setting the type and capacity of

the batteries. Also displays the battery status. Available on Helm Master EX systems equipped with Battery

Management System (BMS).

Calibration: Calibrates various features, such as the Trim Zero Set and compass.

Reset: Resets the engine and gateway data.

Gauges and Graphs 127

Mercury

Engine Gauges

NOTE: This feature is available only when connected to the Mercury SmartCraft Connect gateway.

Select Vessel > Mercury to view the Mercury engine gauges. This screen varies based on the engine network.

Engine voltage or Mercury Steering Angle

Boat status

Boat speed

Fuel

Transmission gear

Engine speed

Trim tabs

Engine trim

The Mercury Steering Angle may appear on the display, depending on the engine model and configuration, and its location on the display may vary.

128 Gauges and Graphs

Setting the Fuel Alarm

CAUTION

The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page164). Failure

to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.

Before you can set a fuel level alarm, you must connect a compatible fuel flow sensor to the chartplotter.

You can set an alarm to sound when the total amount of remaining onboard fuel reaches the level you specify.

1 Select Settings > Alarms > Fuel > Set Total Fuel Onboard > On.

2 Enter the remaining amount of fuel that triggers the alarm, and select Done.

Synchronizing the Fuel Data with the Actual Vessel Fuel

If you are using fuel flow sensors, you must synchronize the fuel levels in the chartplotter with the actual

fuel in the vessel when you add fuel to your vessel. If you are using fuel tank sensors, the level is adjusted

automatically based on the tank level sensor data and it is not necessary to synchronize fuel levels manually

(Fuel Settings, page174).

1 Select Vessel.

2 Select Engines or Fuel.

3 Select Options.

4 Select an option:

• If you have filled up all the fuel tanks on the vessel, select Fill Up All Tanks. The fuel level is set to

maximum capacity.

• If you have added less than a full tank of fuel, select Add Fuel to Boat, and enter the amount added.

• To specify the total fuel in the vessel tanks, select Set Total Fuel Onboard, and enter the total amount of

fuel in the tanks.

Viewing the Wind Gauges

Before you can view wind information, you must have a wind sensor connected to the chartplotter.

Select Vessel > Wind.

Configuring the Sailing Wind Gauge

You can configure the sailing wind gauge to show true or apparent wind speed and angle.

1 From the wind gauge, select Options > Sailing Wind Gauge.

2 Select an option:

• To show true or apparent wind angle, select Needle, and select an option.

• To show true or apparent wind speed, select Wind Speed, and select an option.

Configuring the Speed Source

You can specify whether the vessel speed data displayed on the gauge and used for wind calculations is based

on water speed or GPS speed.

1 From the wind gauge, select Options > Compass Gauge > Speed Display.

2 Select an option:

• To calculate the vessel speed based on data from the water-speed sensor, select Water Speed.

• To calculate the vessel speed based on GPS data, select GPS Speed.

Gauges and Graphs 129

Configuring the Heading Source of the Wind Gauge

You can specify the source of the heading displayed on the wind gauge. Magnetic heading is the heading data

received from a heading sensor, and GPS heading is calculated by your chartplotter GPS (course over ground).

1 From the wind gauge, select Options > Compass Gauge > Heading Source.

2 Select GPS or Magnetic.

NOTE: When moving at low speeds or when stationary, the magnetic compass source is more accurate than

the GPS source.

Customizing the Close-Hauled Wind Gauge

You can specify the range of the close-hauled wind gauge for both the upwind scale and the downwind scale.

1 From the wind gauge, select Options > Compass Gauge > Gauge Type > Close Hauled Gauge.

2 Select an option:

• To set the maximum and minimum values that appear when the upwind close-hauled wind gauge appears,

select Change Upwind Scale, and set the angles.

• To set the maximum and minimum values that appear when the downwind close-hauled wind gauge

appears, select Change Downwind Scale, and set the angles.

• To view true or apparent wind, select Wind, and select an option.

Viewing Trip Gauges

Trip gauges show information for odometer, speed, time, and fuel for your present trip.

Select Info > Trip & Graphs > Trip.

Resetting Trip Gauges

1 Select Info > Trip & Graphs > Trip.

2 Select an option:

• To set all the readings for the present trip to zero, select Reset Trip.

• To set the maximum speed reading to zero, select Reset Maximum Speed.

• To set the odometer reading to zero, select Reset Odometer.

• To set all the readings to zero, select Reset All.

Viewing Graphs

Before you can view graphs of various environmental changes, such as temperature, depth, and wind, you must

have an appropriate transducer or sensor connected to the network.

Select Info > Trip & Graphs > Graphs.

TIP: You can view different available graphs by selecting Change Graph, and selecting a new graph.

Setting the Graph Range and Time Scales

You can indicate the amount of time and the range of depth that appear in the depth and water temperature

graphs.

1 From a graph, select Graph Setup.

2 Select an option:

• To set a time-elapsed scale, select Duration. The default setting is 10 minutes. Increasing the time-

elapsed scale allows you to view variations over a longer period of time. Decreasing the time-elapsed

scale allows you to view more detail over a shorter period of time.

• To set the graph scale, select Scale. Increasing the scale allows you to view more variation in readings.

Decreasing the scale allows you to view more detail in the variation.

130 Gauges and Graphs

Battery Management

You can view the battery and other power sources, and the devices that use those sources.

Batteries are listed along the top of the screen. Other sources of power, such as solar, alternator, converter, and

wind generator, are listed along the left side. The items along the right side of the screen are devices that use

the batteries and other power sources.

Setting Up the Battery Management Page

1 Select Vessel > Battery Management > Options > Edit Devices.

2 Select an item.

3 Select Device, and select an item from the list.

4 If necessary, select Name, enter a name for this device, and select Done.

5 If necessary, select Change Icon, select a new symbol, and select Done.

6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each device.

inReach

Messages

WARNING

Do not read or reply to notifications while operating the vessel. Failure to pay attention to the conditions on the

water can result in vessel damage, personal injury, or death.

You can connect an inReach Mini device to the chartplotter to view, reply to, and send preset messages from

the chartplotter.

NOTE: The inReach Mini device must be connected to the chartplotter and receiving satellite signals to send

and receive messages using the chartplotter.

To open the InReach® page, select Vessel > InReach®.

Connecting an inReach Device to the Chartplotter

You can connect a compatible inReach device to the chartplotter to manage messages.

1 Bring the inReach device within 3m (10ft.) of the chartplotter.

2 From the main menu of the inReach device, select Setup > ANT+ > Status > On.

3 On the chartplotter, select Vessel > InReach® > Start Pairing.

The chartplotter begins searching for and connecting to the inReach device. This can take up to 60 seconds.

4 If necessary, compare the code on the inReach device to the chartplotter, and select OK if they match.

The inReach and chartplotter connect automatically when they are within range.

Receiving inReach Messages

When your inReach device receives a message, a pop-up notification appears briefly on the GPSMAP screen.

• To review the full message, select Review.

• To dismiss the pop-up notification, select OK or wait for the notification to close automatically.

Sending an inReach Preset Message

Preset messages are messages that you created at explore.garmin.com. Preset messages have predefined text

and recipients.

1 From the InReach® page, select Messages > Send inReach Preset.

2 Select a preset message.

3 Select Send.

inReach

Messages 131

Replying to an inReach Message

You can reply to an inReach message with a pre-written message.

1 From the InReach® page, select Messages.

A list of sent and received messages appears.

2 Select a received message.

3 Select Reply.

4 Select a message.

5 Select Send.

Digital Switching

Your chartplotter can be used to monitor and control circuits when connected to a compatible digital switching

system.

For example, you can control the interior lights and navigation lights on the vessel. You can also monitor live

well circuits.

To access the digital switching controls, select Vessel > Switching.

For more information about purchasing and configuring a digital switching system, contact your Garmin dealer.

Adding and Editing a Digital Switching Page

You can add and customize digital switching pages on the chartplotter.

1 Select Vessel > Switching > Options > Setup.

2 Select Add Page or Edit Page.

3 Set up the page as needed:

• To enter a name for the page, select Name.

• To set up the switches, select Edit Switches.

• To add an image of the boat, select Add BoatView Image.

NOTE: You can use the default vessel image or use a custom image of your vessel. You should save the

custom image to the /Garmin folder on the memory card. You can also adjust the view and placement of

the image.

Garmin Boat Switch

™

WARNING

Garmin strongly recommends using a professional installer with proper knowledge of electrical systems to

install the device. Incorrectly installing the device can result in serious bodily injury and damage to the vessel or

the battery.

Configuring the Garmin Boat Switch Device

Some digital switches controlled by the Garmin Boat Switch device must be configured before use.

Configuring a Switch as Momentary

All latching and momentary channels on the Garmin Boat Switch device must be configured in the chartplotter

software as momentary switches for proper operation.

1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,

select Settings > My Vessel > Switching > NMEA Standard.

2 Select the switch number.

3 Select Configuration > Momentary.

132 Digital Switching

Naming a Switch

You can provide a custom name to be used instead of the default name for each switch.

1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,

select Settings > My Vessel > Switching > NMEA Standard.

2 Select the switch number.

3 Select Name > Change Name.

4 Enter a new name.

5 Select Done.

Labeling a Switch

You can provide a custom label for each switch. The switch label is separate from the switch name.

1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,

select Settings > My Vessel > Switching > NMEA Standard.

2 Select the switch number.

3 Select Label > Edit Label.

4 Enter a new label.

5 Select Done.

Showing and Hiding Switches

You can select which switches are hidden or displayed on the Garmin chartplotter.

1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,

select Settings > My Vessel > Switching > NMEA Standard.

2 Select the switch number.

3 Select Visibility to show or hide the switch.

Configuring the Navigation Light Option

WARNING

It is your responsibility to comply with applicable laws, regulations, and standards related to the use and/or

operation of marine navigation lights. Garmin is not responsible for any fines, penalties, citations, or damages

that may be incurred due to any such lack of compliance.

By default, channels 1 and 2 are interlocked for navigation lighting to satisfy the international regulations for

preventing collisions at sea. Depending on the lighting specifics of your boat, you may need to configure the

Garmin Boat Switch device to use the wiring option you that applies to your installation type.

If you do not intend to connect navigation and anchor lights to the device, you can configure channels 1 and 2 to

operate independently as normal latching switches.

1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,

select Vessel > Switching.

2 Press and hold switch 1 for 5 seconds.

Switch 1 starts flashing.

3 Press and hold switch 2 for 5 seconds.

The switch stops flashing, and a message confirms the newly selected wiring option.

4 Repeat the previous two steps until the device is configured for the wiring option that applies to your

installation type.

NOTE: After selecting option C, the next configuration option in the cycle deactivates the interlocks so that

channels 1, 2, and 3 operate independently as normal latching switches.

Digital Switching 133

Using the Bilge Pump Switches

You can manually operate connected bilge pumps by using switches 12 and 13 on the Garmin chartplotter.

1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,

select Vessel > Switching.

2 Select an option:

• Press and hold the bilge pump switch for one second to run the bilge pump for 2 minutes.

• Press and hold the bilge pump switch for three seconds to run the bilge pump continuously.

NOTE: Your Garmin chartplotter notifies you every 5 minutes while continuous mode is active.

Using Dimmable Lights

You can operate connected dimmable lights by using switches 17 through 21 on the Garmin chartplotter.

1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,

select Vessel > Switching.

2 Select an option:

• Press a dimmable light switch to turn a light on or off.

NOTE: The light turns on at the dim level set when the light was last turned off.

• With a light on, press and hold a dimmable light switch dim the light, and release to stop dimming.

• With a light off, press and hold a dimmable light switch to turn on the light at 100% brightness.

Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat

Power-Pole

Anchor System

WARNING

Do not engage the Power-Pole Anchor System while underway. Doing so could cause result in an accident

causing property damage, serious personal injury, or death.

If a compatible Power-Pole anchor system is connected to the NMEA 2000 network, you can use the

chartplotter to control the Power-Pole anchor. The chartplotter automatically detects the Power-Pole anchor

system's C-Monster

gateway on the NMEA 2000 network.

Enabling the Power-Pole Anchor Overlay

You must enable the Power-Pole overlay on the chartplotter to control the Power-Pole anchor.

1 From the page to which you will add the overlay, select Options > Edit Overlays

TIP: To quickly select the overlay, select Toolbars > Anchor.

2 Select an option.

3 Select Power-Pole® Anchor.

After you enable the Power-Pole overlay on the chartplotter, you must set the Power-Pole installation mode to

match the Power-Pole anchor installation on the boat (Setting Up the Power-Pole Anchor, page135).

134 Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat

Setting Up the Power-Pole Anchor

Before you can use the chartplotter to control the Power-Pole anchor, you must select the required installation

mode.

The default initial installation mode setting is None. While the installation mode is set to None, the chartplotter

control of the Power-Pole anchor(s) is inactive.

1 From the Power-Pole toolbar, select > Installation.

2 Select the installation mode that matches the anchor installation on the boat.

• To control a single port side Power-Pole anchor, select Port .

• To control a single starboard side Power-Pole anchor, select Starboard.

• To control dual Power-Pole anchors, select Dual.

3 Use the slider to set the desired speed for the anchor to deploy and retract.

Power-Pole Overlay

Before you can control the Power-Pole anchor with the chartplotter, you must enable the overlay (Enabling the

Power-Pole Anchor Overlay, page134) and set the Power-Pole installation mode (Setting Up the Power-Pole

Anchor, page135).

The layout of the overlay varies based on the installation mode. Refer to your Power-Pole documentation for

more information.

Select to control both anchors simultaneously

Deselect to control the anchors independently

Select to fully retract the anchor

Select to fully extend the anchor

Hold to retract the anchor manually

Release to stop the anchor

Hold to extend the anchor manually

Release to stop the anchor

Select to open the menu

PORT Port side anchor control buttons

STBD Starboard side anchor control buttons

Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat 135

Enabling the Mercury Helm

WARNING

You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The Mercury Helm does not steer the

boat for you and does not avoid navigational hazards. Failure to safely operate your boat could result in an

accident causing property damage, serious personal injury, or death.

With a Mercury engine configured to operate with the Mercury Helm engine control feature on the chartplotter,

you can enable one helm as the active Mercury Helm. The active Mercury Helm controls the Mercury engines

and Mercury chartplotter engine control overlays (for example Mercury Cruise). The overlays at non-active

helms are visible but disabled, so that users at a non-active helm cannot accidentally control the engine.

As you move around the boat, you can change the active Mercury Helm from station to station, up to four.

1 Select Settings > System > Station Information > Mercury Helm.

2 Make a selection.

Mercury Troll Control Features

WARNING

You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The Mercury troll control features do not

steer the boat for you and do not avoid navigational hazards. Failure to safely operate your boat could result in

an accident causing property damage, serious personal injury, or death.

When connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can use the Mercury Troll overlay to set and adjust the

trolling speed from the chartplotter.

Adding the Mercury Troll Control Overlay

When connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can set and adjust the target speed using the Mercury

Troll overlay on the chartplotter.

1 From the page where you want to add the overlay, select Options > Edit Overlays.

TIP: You can also select Toolbars from the menu bar to quickly change the overlays.

2 Select Troll.

3 Select Add.

136 Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat

Mercury Troll Overlay

When connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can use the Mercury Troll overlay on the chartplotter to

set a target speed.

Select to decrease the target speed

Target speed

Select to increase the target speed

Actual speed

Enable Select to engage the Mercury Troll feature

Disable Select to disengage the Mercury Troll feature

Mercury Cruise Control

WARNING

You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. Mercury Cruise Control does not steer

the boat for you and does not avoid navigational hazards. Failure to safely operate your boat could result in an

accident causing property damage, serious personal injury, or death.

When connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can set and adjust the cruise-control function using the

chartplotter.

Enabling the Mercury Cruise Control Overlay

1 From the page where you want to add the overlay, select Options > Edit Overlays.

TIP: You can also select Toolbars from the menu bar to quickly change the overlays.

2 If necessary, select Cruise.

3 Select Mercury Cruise.

4 If necessary, select Add.

Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat 137

Mercury Cruise Control Overlay

Select to decrease the target speed

Target speed

Select to increase the target speed

Actual speed

Enable Select to engage the cruise control

Disable Select to disengage the cruise control

Dometic

Optimus

Features

When connected to a compatible Optimus system, the chartplotter allows you to access and control the

system. You can enable the Optimus overlay to control the Optimus system (Activating the Optimus Overlay Bar,

page138).

When necessary, the Optimus system provides messages with information, instructions, and alerts about faults

and hazards.

A no swimming icon indicates that you should not swim when certain Optimus modes are active. In these

modes, propeller control is automatic and could injure someone in the water.

Activating the Optimus Overlay Bar

1 From a chart, select Options > Edit Overlays.

2 Select Top Bar or Bottom Bar.

3 Select Optimus Bar.

138 Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat

Optimus Overlay Bar Overview

To use the overlay bar, you must connect your Optimus system to your chartplotter and add the overlay bar to

the necessary screens (Activating the Optimus Overlay Bar, page138).

Control mode

Optimus control buttons

Rudder

Standby button

You must press a mode button on the overlay bar to engage or disengage the mode. When the mode is

engaged, the button is illuminated.

The overlay bar configuration and buttons vary, based on systems, modes, and equipment. Refer to your

Optimus documentation for more information.

Optimus Overlay Symbols

Autopilot heading hold

Autopilot track mode

Autopilot route mode

SeaStation

position hold

SeaStation heading hold

Optimus Limp Home Mode

WARNING

In the event of a steering failure, Optimus Limp Home mode becomes available. Limp Home mode is a system

override that may severely limit your boat's control. It should only be used in an emergency if you are unable

to call for assistance. Proceed with extreme caution. Read the Optimus owner's manual and always wear a

personal flotation device (PFD).

You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. Use of Limp Home mode does not relieve

you of the responsibility of safely operating your boat. Avoid navigational hazards and never leave the motor

controls unattended.

When available, the Limp Home button appears on the Optimus overlay bar. Refer to the Optimus owner's

manual before using Limp Home mode.

To engage Limp Home mode from any screen, select Info > Warning Manager > Steering Limp Home.

Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat 139

Tide, Current, and Celestial Information

Tide Station Information

WARNING

Tide and current information is for information purposes only. It is your responsibility to heed all posted

water-related guidance, to remain aware of your surroundings, and to use safe judgment in, on, and around the

water at all times. Failure to heed this warning could result in property damage, serious personal injury, or death.

You can view information about a tide station for a specific date and time, including the tide height, and when

the next high and low tides will occur. By default, the chartplotter shows tide information for the most recently

viewed tide station, present date, and past hour.

Select Info > Tides & Currents > Tides.

Current Station Information

WARNING

Tide and current information is for information purposes only. It is your responsibility to heed all posted

water-related guidance, to remain aware of your surroundings, and to use safe judgment in, on, and around the

water at all times. Failure to heed this warning could result in property damage, serious personal injury, or death.

NOTE: Current station information is available with certain detailed maps.

You can view information about a current station for a specific date and time, including the current speed and

level of the current. By default, the chartplotter shows current information for the most recently viewed current

station and for the present date and time.

Select Info > Tides & Currents > Currents.

Celestial Information

You can view information about sunrise, sunset, moonrise, moonset, moon phase, and the approximate sky view

location of the sun and moon. The center of the screen represents the sky overhead, and the outermost rings

represent the horizon. By default, the chartplotter shows celestial information for the present date and time.

Select Info > Tides & Currents > Celestial.

Viewing Tide Station, Current Station, or Celestial Information for a Different Date

1 Select Info > Tides & Currents.

2 Select Tides, Currents, or Celestial.

3 Select an option:

• To view information for a different date, select Change Date > Manual, and enter a date.

• To view information for today, select Change Date > Current.

• If available, to view information for the day after the date shown, select Next Day.

• If available, to view information for the day before the date shown, select Previous Day.

Viewing Information for a Different Tide or Current Station

1 Select Info > Tides & Currents.

2 Select Tides or Currents.

3 Select Nearby Stations.

4 Select a station.

140 Tide, Current, and Celestial Information

Viewing Almanac Information from the Navigation Chart

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select a location.

2 Select Information.

3 Select Tides, Currents, or Celestial.

Warning Manager

During an active warning, an indicator appears on the menu bar. The Warning Manager displays a color-coded

alarm icon and prioritizes alarm messages by severity.

To open the Warning Manager, select the icon on the menu bar or select Info, and select Warning Manager.

Color Severity

Red Hazards that require immediate action to avoid severe personal injury or death

Yellow Hazards or unsafe practices which could result in minor personal injury or product or property damage

Viewing Messages

1 From the menu bar, select Info or .

2 Select Warning Manager.

3 Select a message.

4 Select Review.

Sorting and Filtering Messages

1 Select Info > Warning Manager > Sort/Filter.

2 Select an option to sort or filter the message list.

Saving Messages to a Memory Card

1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.

2 Select Info > Warning Manager > Save to Card.

Clearing All of the Messages

Select Info > Warning Manager > Clear Warning Manager.

Media Player

If you have a compatible stereo or stereos connected to the chartplotter, you can control the audio using the

media player on the chartplotter:

• If you have a Fusion-Link

™

compatible stereo connected to the NMEA 2000 network or the Garmin Marine

Network, you can control the stereo using the chartplotter. The chartplotter should automatically detect the

stereo.

• If you have multiple Fusion

stereos connected to one another using Fusion PartyBus

™

networking, you can

control the networked stereos and groups using the chartplotter. As long as you have one of the networked

Fusion stereos connected to the NMEA 2000 network or the Garmin Marine Network, the chartplotter should

automatically detect the stereos.

• If you have a compatible third-party stereo connected to the NMEA 2000 network, you may be able to control

the stereo using the chartplotter.

NOTE: Not all features are available on all connected stereos.

NOTE: You can play media only from sources that are connected to the stereo.

Warning Manager 141

Opening the Media Player

Before you can open the media player, you must connect a compatible device to the chartplotter.

Select Vessel > Media.

TIP: To quickly add the media overlay to a page, select Toolbars > Media > Add.

Media Player Icons

NOTE: Not all devices have these icons.

Icon Description

Saves or deletes a channel as a preset

Repeats all songs

Repeats one song



Scans for AM/FM radio stations

Skips to next or previous track (tap)

Fast forwards or rewinds (hold)

Shuffles

Increases the volume

Decreases the volume

Mutes volume

Expands the media player to full screen

Selecting the Media Device and Source

You can select the media source connected to the stereo. When you have multiple stereo or media devices

connected on a network, you can select the device from which you want to play music.

NOTE: You can play media only from sources that are connected to the stereo.

NOTE: Not all features are available on all media devices and sources.

1 From the media screen, select Devices, and select the stereo.

2 From the media screen, select Source, and select the media source.

NOTE: The Devices button only appears when more than one media device is connected to the network.

NOTE: The Source button only appears for devices that support multiple media sources.

Adjusting the Volume and Audio Levels

Adjusting the Volume

NOTE: If your vessel's media system is set up in zones, the volume controls on the media screen adjust the

volume for the Home Zone (Selecting the Home Zone, page143).

From the media screen, use the slider or and to adjust the volume.

142 Media Player

Adjusting the Audio Level

You can use the equalizer to adjust the audio levels on a connected media device.

NOTE: If the media system has multiple zones, adjusting the audio level tone controls affects the home zone

only. You can change the home zone to adjust the audio levels in other zones (Selecting the Home Zone,

page143).

1 From the media screen, select Options > Audio Levels.

2 Select or to adjust the audio levels you want to change.

Muting the Media Volume

1 From the media screen, select .

2 If necessary, select Select.

Stereo Zones and Groups

NOTE: The Zones button appears only for stereos that support multiple speaker zones.

NOTE: The Groups option appears only when you have multiple Fusion stereos connected to one another using

Fusion PartyBus networking.

If a connected stereo is set up to support multiple speaker zones, you can control the audio of the zones

individually from the media screen on the chartplotter. For example, you could make the audio quieter in the

cabin and louder on the deck (Adjusting the Zone Volume, page144).

If you have multiple Fusion stereos connected to one another using Fusion PartyBus networking, you can create

stereo groups and control the networked stereos and groups using the chartplotter.

Depending on the capabilities of the stereo or stereos connected to the chartplotter, you may have multiple

options for controlling zone audio:

• For third-party stereos and stereos using Fusion-Link technology, the Local Zones tab allow you to adjust the

volume for all of the enabled speaker zones on the connected stereo.

• For multiple Fusion stereos connected to one another using Fusion PartyBus networking, the Group Zones

tab allows you to adjust the volume for any zones on a stereo in the same group as Home Zone.

• For multiple Fusion stereos connected to one another using Fusion PartyBus networking, the Network tab

allows you to adjust the volume for any zone on any stereo connected to the Fusion PartyBus network.

Selecting the Home Zone

If you have multiple stereos connected to the chartplotter, or have a stereo or stereos with multiple speaker

zones connected to the chartplotter, you must designate one speaker zone on one stereo as the home zone.

The playback and volume controls on the media screen adjust only the stereo or zone set as the home zone.

The playback information on the media screen shows the source playing on the Home Zone stereo.

It is recommended to set the home zone as the zone closest to the chartplotter.

NOTE: Some stereos may feature a global zone. Setting a global zone as the home zone allows the controls on

the media page to affect all of the zones on a stereo or media device.

NOTE: The Zones button only appears for stereos or media devices that support multiple media zones.

1 From the media screen, select Options > Home Zone.

2 If necessary, select a connected stereo.

3 Select the zone you want to set as the Home Zone.

The name of the selected home zone appears on the media screen.

Media Player 143

Adjusting the Zone Volume

NOTE: The Zones button appears only for stereos that support multiple speaker zones.

1 From the media screen, select Zones.

A list of available zones appears.

2 If necessary, change the zone group to view the zone you want to adjust (Stereo Zones and Groups,

page143).

3 Select and to adjust the volume for a zone.

Disabling a Speaker Zone

If your connected media device features speaker zones, you can disable unused zones.

1 From the media screen, select Options > Installation.

2 Select a connected stereo.

3 Select Zones.

4 Select the zone you want to disable.

5 Select Enable.

The green bar on the button turns gray to indicate that the zone is disabled. You can select Enable to enable

a disabled zone.

Creating a Group

If you have multiple Fusion stereos connected to each other using Fusion PartyBus networking, you can create

stereo groups and control the networked stereos and groups using the chartplotter. One stereo must be

connected to the chartplotter through the NMEA 2000 network.

See the installation instructions and owner's manual provided with your compatible Fusion stereo for full

information about how to install and configure a Fusion PartyBus network.

NOTE: There are some limitations when streaming sources on the Fusion PartyBus network. See the owner's

manual for your Fusion stereo for more information.

1 From the media screen, select Options > Groups.

2 Select the name of the stereo you want to be the primary stereo in the group, and select Set as Source.

3 Select the stereos you want to include in the group.

4 Select Done.

Editing a Group

1 From the media screen, select Options > Groups.

2 Select the name of an existing group.

3 Select the stereos you want to add to or remove from the group.

4 Select Done.

Playing Music

Browsing for Music

You can browse for music in some media sources.

1 From the media screen and an applicable source, select the button with the source name, such as USB.

2 Browse for, and select an item to play.

144 Media Player

Enabling Alphabetical Search

You can enable the alphabetical search feature to find a song or album in a large list.

1 From the media screen, select Options > Installation.

2 Select the device.

3 Select Alpha Search.

4 Select the maximum number of tracks to appear in the search results.

To disable the alphabetical search feature, select Alpha Searching Off.

Setting a Song to Repeat

1 From the media screen while a song is playing, select an option.

• Select Options > Repeat.

• Select Options > Browse > Repeat.

2 If necessary, select Single.

NOTE: Not all media devices and sources support the Single option for the Repeat control.

Setting All Songs to Repeat

NOTE: Not all media devices and sources support the All option for the Repeat control.

From the media screen, select an option:

• Select Options > Repeat > All.

• Select Options > Browse > Repeat > All.

Setting Songs to Shuffle

From the media screen, select an option:

• Select Options > Shuffle.

• Select Options > Browse > Shuffle.

Radio

To listen to AM or FM radio, you must have a suitable marine AM/FM antenna properly connected to the stereo

and be within range of a broadcasting station. For instructions on connecting an AM/FM antenna, see the

stereo installation instructions.

To listen to SiriusXM

radio, you must have the appropriate equipment and subscriptions (SiriusXM Satellite

Radio, page147). For instructions on connecting a SiriusXM Connect Vehicle Tuner, see the stereo installation

instructions.

To listen to DAB stations, you must have the appropriate equipment (DAB Playback, page146). For instructions

on connecting a DAB adapter and antenna, see the installation instructions provided with your adapter and

antenna.

Setting the Tuner Region

1 From the media screen, select Options > Installation > Tuner Region.

2 Select an option.

Changing the Radio Station

1 From the media screen, select an applicable source, such as FM.

2 Select or to tune to a station.

Media Player 145

Changing the Tuning Mode

You can change how you select a station for some media types, such as FM or AM radio.

NOTE: Not all tuning modes are available for all media sources.

Press the button between the and buttons to cycle between the tuning modes:

• To select a station manually, select MANUAL.

• To scan or stop on the next available station, select AUTO.

• To select a saved station preset, select FAVORITE.

• To select a category in some media sources, select CATEGORY.

Presets

You can save your favorite AM stations and FM stations as presets for easy access.

You can save your favorite SiriusXM channels if the stereo is connected to an optional SiriusXM tuner and

antenna.

You can save your favorite DAB stations if the stereo is connected to the proper DAB equipment and set to the

correct tuner region. (DAB Playback, page146)

Saving a Station as a Preset

1 From an applicable media screen, tune to the station to save as a preset.

2 Select Presets > Add Current Channel.

Selecting a Preset

1 From an applicable media screen, select Presets.

2 Select a preset from the list.

3 Select Tune to Channel.

Removing a Preset

1 From an applicable media screen, select Presets.

2 Select a preset from the list.

3 Select Remove Current Channel.

DAB Playback

When you connect a compatible Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) module and antenna, such as the Fusion

MS-DAB100A to a compatible stereo, you can tune in to and play DAB stations

To use the DAB source, you must be in a region in which DAB is available, and select the tuner region (Setting

the DAB Tuner Region, page146).

Setting the DAB Tuner Region

You must select the region you are in to receive DAB stations properly.

1 From the media screen, select Options > Installation > Tuner Region.

2 Select the region you are in.

Scanning for DAB Stations

NOTE: Because DAB signals are broadcast in select countries only, you must set the tuner region to a location

where DAB signals are broadcast.

1 Select the DAB source.

2 Select Scan to scan for available DAB stations.

When scanning is complete, the first available station in the first ensemble found begins playing.

NOTE: After the first scan is complete, you can select Scan again to re-scan for DAB stations. When the

re-scan is complete, the system starts playing the first station in the ensemble you were listening to when

you started the re-scan.

146 Media Player

Changing DAB Stations

1 Select the DAB source.

2 If necessary, select Scan to scan for local DAB stations.

3 Select or to change the station.

When you reach the end of the current ensemble, the stereo automatically changes to the first available

station in the next ensemble.

TIP: You can hold or to change the ensemble.

Selecting a DAB Station from a List

1 From the DAB media screen, select Browse > Stations.

2 Select a station from the list.

Selecting a DAB Station from a Category

1 From the DAB media screen, select Browse > Categories.

2 Select a category from the list.

3 Select a station from the list.

DAB Presets

You can save your favorite DAB stations as presets for easy access.

You can save up to 15 DAB-station presets.

Saving a DAB Station as a Preset

1 From the DAB media screen, select the station to save as a preset.

2 Select Browse > Presets > Save Current.

Selecting a DAB Preset from a List

1 From the DAB media screen, select Browse > Presets > View Presets.

2 Select a preset from the list.

Removing DAB Presets

1 From the DAB media screen, select Browse > Presets.

2 Select an option:

• To remove one preset, select Remove Preset, and select the preset.

• To remove all presets, select Remove All Presets.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio

When you have a FUSION-Link

™

capable stereo and SiriusXM Connect Tuner installed and connected to the

chartplotter, you may have access to SiriusXM satellite radio, depending on your subscription.

Locating a SiriusXM Radio ID

Before you can activate your SiriusXM subscription, you must have the radio ID of your SiriusXM Connect Tuner.

You can locate the SiriusXM Radio ID on the back of the SiriusXM Connect Tuner, on the back of its packaging,

or by tuning your chartplotter to channel 0.

1 Select Media > Source > SiriusXM.

2 Tune to channel 0.

The SiriusXM radio ID does not include the letters I, O, S, or F.

Media Player 147

Activating a SiriusXM Subscription

1 With the SiriusXM source selected, tune to channel 1.

You should be able to hear the preview channel. If not, check the SiriusXM Connect Tuner and antenna

installation and connections, and try again.

2 Tune to channel 0 to locate the Radio ID.

3 Contact SiriusXM listener care by phone at (866) 635-2349 or go to siriusxm.com/activatenow to subscribe

in the United States. Contact SiriusXM by phone at (877) 438-9677 or go to siriusxm.ca/activatexm to

subscribe in Canada.

4 Provide the Radio ID.

The activation process usually takes 10 to 15 minutes, but can take up to an hour. For the SiriusXM Connect

Tuner to receive the activation message, it must be turned on and receiving the SiriusXM signal.

5 If the service is not activated within the hour, go to http://care.siriusxm.com/refresh or contact SiriusXM

Listener Care by phone at 1-866-635-2349.

Customizing the Channel Guide

SiriusXM radio channels are grouped in categories. You can select the categories of channels that appear in the

channel guide.

Select an option:

• If the media device is a FUSION-Link capable stereo, select Media > Browse > Channel.

• If the media device is a GXM

™

antenna, select Media > Category.

Saving a SiriusXM Channel to the Presets List

You can save your favorite channels to the presets list.

1 Select Media.

2 Select the channel to save as a preset.

3 Select an option:

• If the media device is a FUSION-Link capable stereo, select Browse > Presets.

• If the media device is a GXM antenna, select Options > Presets > Add Current Channel.

Parental Controls

The parental control feature allows you to limit access to any SiriusXM channels, including those with mature

content. When the parental control feature is enabled, you must enter a passcode to tune to the locked

channels. You can also change the 4-digit passcode.

Unlocking SiriusXM Parental Controls

1 From the media screen, select Browse > Parental > Unlock.

2 Enter your passcode.

The default passcode is 0000.

Setting Parental Controls on SiriusXM Radio Channels

Before you can set parental controls, the parental controls must be unlocked.

The parental control feature allows you to limit access to any SiriusXM channels, including those with mature

content. When enabled, the parental control feature requires you to enter a passcode to tune to the locked

channels.

Select Browse > Parental > Lock/Unlock.

A list of channels appears. A checkmark indicates a locked channel.

NOTE: When you view the channels after setting parental controls, the display changes:

• indicates a locked channel.

• indicates an unlocked channel.

148 Media Player

Clearing All Locked Channels on a SiriusXM Radio

Before you can clear all locked channels, the parental controls must be unlocked.

1 From the media screen, select Browse > Parental > Clear All Locked.

2 Enter your passcode.

Restoring Default Parental Control Settings Values

This process deletes all the settings information you have entered. When you restore the parental control

settings to their default values, the passcode value is reset to 0000.

1 From the media menu, select Installation > Factory Defaults.

2 Select Yes.

Changing a Parental Passcode on a SiriusXM Radio

Before you can change the passcode, the parental controls must be unlocked.

1 From the media screen, select Browse > Parental > Change PIN.

2 Enter your passcode and select Done.

3 Enter a new passcode.

4 Confirm the new passcode.

Setting the Device Name

1 From the media screen, select Options > Installation > Set Device Name.

2 Enter a device name.

3 Select Select or Done.

Updating the Media Player Software

You can update the software on compatible connected stereos and accessories.

See the stereo Owner's Manual at support.garmin.com for instructions on updating the software.

SiriusXM Weather

WARNING

The weather information provided through this product is subject to service interruptions and may contain

errors, inaccuracies, or outdated information, and consequently should not be relied upon exclusively. Always

use common sense while navigating, and check alternate weather information sources prior to making safety-

related decisions. You acknowledge and agree that you shall be solely responsible for use of the weather

information and all decisions taken with respect to navigating in weather. Garmin will not be responsible for any

consequences of using SiriusXM weather information.

NOTE: SiriusXM data is not available in all regions.

A Garmin SiriusXM satellite weather receiver and antenna receives satellite weather data and shows it on

various Garmin devices, including the Navigation chart on a compatible chartplotter. The weather data for

each feature comes from reputable weather data centers such as the National Weather Service and the

Hydrometeorological Prediction Center. For more information, go to www.siriusxm.com/sxmmarine.

SiriusXM Equipment and Subscription Requirements

To use satellite weather, you must have a compatible satellite weather receiver. To use SiriusXM satellite

radio, you must have a compatible satellite radio receiver. Go to www.garmin.com for more information. You

must also have a valid subscription to receive satellite weather and radio. For more information, refer to the

instructions for your satellite weather and radio equipment.

SiriusXM Weather 149

Weather Data Broadcasts

Weather data is broadcast at different intervals for each weather feature. For example, radar is broadcast at

five-minute intervals. When the Garmin receiver is turned on, or when a different weather feature is selected, the

receiver must receive new data before it can be shown. You might experience a delay before weather data or a

different feature appears on the chart.

NOTE: Any weather feature can change in appearance if the source that provides the information changes.

Weather Warnings and Weather Bulletins

When a marine weather warning, weather watch, weather advisory, weather bulletin, or other weather statement

is issued, shading indicates the area to which the information applies. The aqua lines on the chart indicate the

boundaries of marine forecasts, coastal forecasts, and offshore forecasts. Weather bulletins may consist of

either weather watches or weather advisories.

To view information about the warning or bulletin, select the shaded area.

Color Marine Weather Group

Cyan Flash Flood

Blue Flood

Red Marine

Yellow Severe Storm

Red Tornado

Viewing Precipitation Information

Precipitation ranging from very light rain and snow, up to strong thunderstorms, is indicated in varying shades

and colors. Precipitation is shown either independently or with other weather information.

Select Charts > Precipitation.

The time stamp in the upper-left corner of the screen indicates the elapsed time since the weather data

provider last updated the information.

Storm Cell and Lightning Information

Storm cell are represented by the icon on the weather precipitation chart. They indicate both the present

position of a storm and the projected path of that storm in the immediate future.

Red cones appear with a storm cell icon, and the widest part of each cone points in the direction of the

projected path of the storm cell. The red lines in each cone indicate where the storm will most likely be in the

near future. Each line represents 15 minutes.

Lightning strikes are represented by the icon. Lightning appears on the weather precipitation chart if strikes

were detected within the last seven minutes. The ground-based lightning detection network detects cloud-to-

ground lightning only.

NOTE: This feature is not available on all devices and in all subscriptions.

Hurricane Information

The weather Precipitation chart can show the present position of a hurricane , a tropical storm, or a tropical

depression. A red line stemming from a hurricane icon indicates the projected path of the hurricane. Darkened

dots on the red line indicate the projected locations through which the hurricane will pass, as received from the

weather data provider.

Forecast Information

The Forecast chart shows city forecasts, marine forecasts, warnings, hurricane warnings, METARS, county

warnings, weather fronts and pressure centers, surface pressure, and weather buoys.

150 SiriusXM Weather

Viewing a Marine Forecast or an Offshore Forecast

1 Select Charts > Forecast.

2 Pan the chart to an offshore location.

The Marine Forecast or Offshore Forecast options appear when forecast information is available.

3 Select Marine Forecast or Offshore Forecast.

Viewing Forecast Information for Another Time Period

1 Select Charts > Forecast.

2 Select an option:

• To view the weather forecast for the next 48 hours, in 12-hour increments, select multiple times.

• To view the weather forecast for the previous 48 hours, in 12-hour increments, select multiple times.

Weather Fronts and Pressure Centers

Weather fronts appear as lines that indicate the leading edge of an air mass.

Front Symbol Description

Cold front

Warm front

Stationary front

Occluded front

Trough

Pressure-center symbols often appear near weather fronts.

Pressure-Center

Symbol

Description

Indicates a low-pressure center, which is a region of relatively lower pressure. Moving away

from a low-pressure center results in increased pressure. Winds flow counterclockwise

around low-pressure centers in the northern hemisphere.

Indicates a high-pressure center, which is a region of relatively higher pressure. Moving

away from a high-pressure center results in decreased pressure. Winds flow clockwise

around high-pressure centers in the northern hemisphere.

SiriusXM Weather 151

City Forecasts

City forecasts appear as weather symbols. The forecast is viewed in 12-hour increments.

Symbol Weather

Fair (sunny, hot, clear)

Partly cloudy

Cloudy

Rain (drizzle, sleet, showers)

Thunderstorms

Windy

Smoke (dusty, hazy)

Foggy

Snow (snow showers, flurries, blizzard, blowing snow, sleet, freezing rain, freezing drizzle)

Viewing Fish Mapping Data

NOTE: This feature requires a GXM 54 antenna and a SiriusXM Fish Mapping

™

service subscription.

The Fish Mapping weather chart shows information that can help you locate fish species.

1 Select Charts > Fish Mapping.

2 If necessary, select Options > Layers, and turn on and off information.

Viewing Sea Conditions

The Sea Conditions feature shows information about surface conditions, including winds, wave height, wave

period, and wave direction.

Select Charts > Sea Conditions.

152 SiriusXM Weather

Surface Winds

Surface wind vectors appear on the Sea Conditions chart using wind barbs that indicate the direction from

which the wind is blowing. A wind barb is a circle with a tail. The line or flag attached to the tail of the wind

barb indicates the wind speed. A short line represents 5 knots, a long line represents 10 knots, and triangle

represents 50 knots.

Wind Barb Wind Speed

Calm

5 knots

10 knots

15 knots

20 knots

50 knots

65 knots

Wave Height, Wave Period, and Wave Direction

Wave heights for an area appear as variations in color. Different colors indicate different wave heights, as

shown in the legend.

The wave period indicates the time (in seconds) between successive waves. Wave period lines indicate areas

that have the same wave period.

Wave directions appear on the chart using red arrows. The direction of each arrow pointer indicates the

direction in which a wave is moving.

Viewing Forecast Sea Conditions Information for Another Time Period

1 Select Charts > Sea Conditions.

2 Select an option:

• To view forecasted sea conditions for the next 36 hours, in 12-hour increments, select multiple

times.

• To view the forecasted sea conditions for the previous 36 hours, in 12-hour increments, select

multiple times.

Viewing Sea Temperature Information

The Sea Temperature weather chart shows the present water temperature and present surface pressure

conditions.

Select Charts > Sea Temperature.

SiriusXM Weather 153

Surface Pressure and Water Temperature Data

Surface-pressure information appears as pressure isobars and pressure centers. Isobars connect points of

equal pressure. Pressure readings can help to determine weather and wind conditions. High-pressure areas are

generally associated with fair weather. Low-pressure areas are generally associated with clouds and the chance

of precipitation. Isobars packed closely together show a strong pressure gradient. Strong pressure gradients are

associated with areas of stronger winds.

Pressure units are shown in millibars (mb), inches of Mercury (inHg), or hectopascals (hPa).

Colored shading indicates the surface temperature of the water, as shown in the legend in the corner of the

display.

Changing the Sea Surface Temperature Color Range

You can change the color range dynamically to view higher resolution sea surface temperature readings.

1 Select Charts > Sea Temperature > Options > Sea Temperature.

2 Select an option:

• To allow the chartplotter to adjust the temperature range automatically, select Auto Configure.

The chartplotter automatically finds the lower and upper limits for the current screen, and updates the

temperature-color scale.

• To enter the lower and upper limits for the temperature range, select Lower Limit or Upper Limit, and enter

the lower or upper limit.

Visibility Information

Visibility is the forecast maximum horizontal distance that can be seen at the surface, as shown in the legend

on the left of the screen. Variations in the visibility shading show the forecast change in surface visibility.

NOTE: This feature is not available on all devices and in all subscriptions.

Select Charts > Visibility.

Viewing Forecast Visibility Information for Another Time Period

1 Select Charts > Visibility.

2 Select an option:

• To view the visibility forecast for the next 36 hours, in 12-hour increments, select multiple times.

• To view the visibility forecast for the previous 36 hours, in 12-hour increments, select multiple times.

Viewing Buoy Reports

Report readings are taken from buoys and coastal observation stations. These readings are used to determine

air temperature, dew point, water temperature, tide, wave height and period, wind direction and speed, visibility,

and barometric pressure.

1 From a weather chart, select a buoy icon.

2 Select Buoy.

Viewing Local Weather Information near a Buoy

You can select an area near a buoy to view forecast information.

1 From a weather chart, select a location on the chart.

2 Select Local Weather.

3 Select an option:

• To view present weather conditions from a local weather service, select Current Condition.

• To view a local weather forecast, select Forecast.

• To view surface wind and barometric pressure information, select Sea Surface.

• To view wind and wave information, select Marine Bulletin.

154 SiriusXM Weather

Weather Overlay

The weather overlay superimposes weather and weather-related information on the Navigation chart, the

Fishing chart, and the Perspective 3D chart view. The Navigation chart and the Fishing chart can show weather

radar, height of cloud tops, lightning, weather buoys, county warnings, and hurricane warnings. The Perspective

3D chart view can show weather radar.

Weather overlay settings configured for use on one chart are not applied to another chart. The weather overlay

settings for each chart must be configured separately.

NOTE: The Fishing chart is available with premium charts, in some areas.

Viewing Weather Subscription Information

You can view information about the weather services you have subscribed to and how many minutes have

passed since the data for each service was updated.

From a weather chart, select Options > Subscription.

Viewing Video

WARNING

Do not view video or photos while operating the vessel. Failure to pay attention to the conditions on the water

can result in vessel damage, personal injury, or death.

Before you can view video, you must connect to a compatible source.

Compatible devices include video devices connected to the ports on the chartplotter or to the Garmin Marine

Network, as well as supported network (IP-based) video cameras, encoders, and thermal cameras.

Select Vessel > Video.

Selecting a Video Source

1 From the video screen, select Options > Source.

2 Select the source of the video feed.

Alternating Among Multiple Video Sources

If you have two or more video sources, you can alternate between them using a specific time interval.

1 From the video screen, select Options > Source > Alternate.

2 Select Time, and select the amount of time each video appears.

3 Select Source, and select the video sources to add to the alternating sequence.

Networked Video Devices

NOTICE

A Garmin Power over Ethernet (PoE) Isolation Coupler (P/N 010-10580-10) must be used when connecting

Ethernet devices, such as FLIR

cameras, to a Garmin Marine Network. Connecting an Ethernet device directly to

a Garmin Marine Network chartplotter damages the Garmin chartplotter and may damage the Ethernet device.

Before you can view and control video devices such as IP cameras, encoders, and thermal cameras using your

chartplotter, you must have a compatible video device connected to your chartplotter, and you must have a

marine network cable Power over Ethernet (PoE) isolation coupler. Go to garmin.com for a list of compatible

devices or to purchase a PoE Isolation Coupler.

You can connect multiple supported video cameras and up to two video encoders to the Garmin Marine

Network. You can select and view up to four video sources at once. Chartplotters with multiple composite

built-in video inputs can display a single built-in video input only. When the cameras are connected, the network

detects them automatically and displays them in the source list.

Viewing Video 155

Using Video Presets on Networked Video Cameras

You can save, name, and activate video presets for each networked video source.

Saving Video Presets on a Networked Video Camera

1 From a video screen, touch the screen.

The video controls appear on the screen.

2 Hold a video preset button.

A green light indicates the setting is stored.

Naming Video Presets on a Networked Video Camera

1 From a video screen, select Options > Video Setup > Presets.

2 Select a preset.

3 Select Rename.

4 Enter preset name.

Activating Video Presets on a Networked Video Camera

You can quickly return networked cameras to preset values.

1 From a video screen, touch the screen.

The video controls appear on the screen.

2 Select a video preset.

The camera restores the video settings saved for that preset.

TIP: You can also save and activate presets using the video menu.

Camera Settings

Some cameras provide additional options to control the camera view.

NOTE: Not all options are available on all camera models and chartplotter models. Refer to the camera manual

for a list of available features. You may need to update the camera software to use this feature.

From the infrared video screen, select Options.

IR Blend: Selects the infrared effect to MSX

(Multi-Spectral Dynamic Imaging) mode or CTV (Color Thermal

Vision

™

) mode, and allows you to blend the effects.

IR/Visible: Displays an infrared or visible light image.

Scan: Surveys the surrounding area.

Freeze: Pauses the camera image.

Change Colors: Selects the color scheme of the infrared image.

Change Scene: Selects the infrared image mode, such as day, night, MOB, or docking.

Video Setup: Opens more video options.

156 Viewing Video

Video Settings

Some cameras provide additional setup options.

NOTE: Not all options are available on all camera models and chartplotter models. You may need to update the

camera software to use this feature.

From the video screen, select Options > Video Setup.

Set Input: Associates the camera with a video source.

Mirror: Reverses the image like a rearview mirror.

Standby: Places the camera in standby mode to conserve power and protect the lens when not in use.

Home Position: Sets the home position of the camera.

Scan Speed: Sets how quickly the camera moves during a scan.

Scan Width: Sets the width of the image captured by the camera during a scan.

Stabilization: Stabilizes the picture using mechanical means.

Low Light: Optimizes the video for low-light environments.

Aspect: Sets the aspect ratio.

Defog: Optimizes the video for foggy environments.

Dynamic Range: Sets the range to wide or standard.

E. Stabilization: Stabilizes the picture using software image processing.

Light: Controls the camera's integrated light source to help illuminate the environment.

Name: Allows you to enter a new name for this camera.

FLIR™ Menu: Provides access to the settings for the camera.

Associating the Camera to a Video Source

You may need to associate the camera with a video source.

1 From the video screen, select Options > Source.

2 Select the camera.

3 Select Video Setup > Set Input.

4 Select the video input.

Video Camera Movement Control

NOTICE

Do not aim the camera at the sun or extremely bright objects. Damage to the lens may occur.

Always use the chartplotter controls or buttons to pan and tilt the camera. Do not manually move the camera

unit. Manually moving the camera may damage the camera.

NOTE: This feature is available only when a compatible camera is connected. You may need to update the

camera software to use this feature.

You can control the movements of the connected video cameras that support panning, tilting, and zooming.

Controlling Video Cameras Using On-Screen Controls

On-screen controls allow you to control pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras. Refer to the camera manual for a list of

available features.

1 From a video screen, touch the screen.

The video controls appear on the screen.

2 Select an option:

• To zoom in and out, use the zoom button.

• To pan or tilt the camera, use the compass rose.

TIP: Hold within the compass rose to continue to move the camera in the desired direction.

Viewing Video 157

Controlling a Video Camera Using Gestures

When a networked video camera supports gesture responses, you can control pan-tilt-zoom cameras using

gestures directly on the chartplotter screen. Check your camera user manual for a list of available features.

TIP: Using gestures allows video control without displaying the video controls.

1 From a video screen, touch the screen.

2 Select an option:

• To zoom in and out with the camera, use pinch and zoom gestures.

• To pan or tilt the camera, swipe the screen in the desired direction.

Configuring the Video Appearance

NOTE: Not all options are available on all camera models and chartplotter models.

1 From the video screen, select Options > Video Setup.

2 Select an option:

• To show the video using a stretched aspect ratio, select Aspect > Stretch. The video cannot be stretched

beyond the dimensions provided by the connected video device, and it may not fill the entire screen.

• To show the video using a standard aspect ratio, select Aspect > Standard.

• To adjust the brightness, select Brightness, and select Up, Down, or Auto.

• To adjust the color saturation, select Saturation, and select Up, Down, or Auto.

• To adjust the contrast, select Contrast, and select Up, Down, or Auto.

• To allow the chartplotter to automatically select the source format, select Standard > Auto.

Garmin VIRB

Action Cameras

WARNING

Do not view video or photos while operating the vessel. Failure to pay attention to the conditions on the water

can result in vessel damage, personal injury, or death.

Most VIRB action cameras connect to the chartplotter from the camera menu (Connecting a VIRB Action

Camera, page159).

The VIRB 360 camera connects using WPS (Connecting a VIRB 360 Action Camera, page158).

In this manual, the term "VIRB action camera" refers to all models, except in the instructions on how to connect.

In that case, as listed above, the term "VIRB 360 camera" refers to only the 360 model.

Connecting a VIRB 360 Action Camera

You can connect a VIRB 360 action camera to the chartplotter using WPS. If you are connecting a VIRB camera,

connect through the camera settings (Connecting a VIRB Action Camera, page159).

1 Set up the chartplotter's Wi‑Fi network (Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network, page26).

2 Bring the camera near the chartplotter.

3 On the VIRB 360 camera main menu, select Wireless > Wi-Fi.

4 If necessary, select the Wi-Fi toggle switch to enable the Wi‑Fi technology.

5 Press to select WPS, and press OK.

6 On the chartplotter, select Vessel > VIRB® > .

The camera searches for the Wi‑Fi network and connects.

You can control the camera using the chartplotter.

158 Viewing Video

Connecting a VIRB Action Camera

You connect a VIRB action camera to the chartplotter using the camera settings. If you are connecting a VIRB

360 camera, connect through the VIRB app (Connecting a VIRB 360 Action Camera, page158).

1 Set up the chartplotter's Wi‑Fi network (Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network, page26).

2 From the VIRB camera main menu, select Wireless > Wi-Fi > Status to turn on Wi‑Fi wireless technology.

3 Select Mode > Connect.

4 Select Add New.

The camera searches for nearby Wi‑Fi networks.

5 Select the chartplotter's Wi‑Fi network, and enter the network password.

The app and the camera connect to the chartplotter's Wi‑Fi network.

You can control the camera using the chartplotter.

Controlling the VIRB Action Camera with the Chartplotter

Before you can control a VIRB action camera with the chartplotter, you must connect the devices using a

wireless connection.

You can connect up to five VIRB action cameras to the chartplotter.

After you connect the VIRB action camera with the chartplotter, a new option is added to Vessel. You can start

and stop recording on the VIRB action camera using the chartplotter.

NOTE: The VIRB image shown on the chartplotter is a in a lower resolution than the VIRB action camera records.

To view the high-resolution video, view the video on a computer or television.

1 Select Vessel > VIRB®.

2 Select an option:

• To take a still photograph, select .

• To begin recording, select .

When recording, the remaining recording memory is shown.

• To stop recording, select again.

• If you have more than one VIRB action camera connected, use the arrows to select a different action

camera to control.

• To view stored videos or images, select .

• To pan and tilt the VIRB 360, drag your finger on the screen.

• To return the VIRB 360 view to the home position, select .

Controlling the VIRB Action Camera Video Playback

You can view VIRB action camera video and images using the chartplotter.

NOTE: The VIRB playback on the chartplotter is shown in the same quality as the live view on the chartplotter.

To view the high-resolution video, view the video on a computer or television.

1 From the VIRB® screen, select .

2 Wait a few seconds for the thumbnail images to load.

3 Select a video or image.

4 Control the playback using the on-screen buttons or menu options:

• To stop the video, select .

• To pause the video, select .

• To replay the video, select .

• To play the video, select .

• To skip ahead or back in the video, drag the slider.

Viewing Video 159

Deleting a VIRB Video

You can delete a video or image from the VIRB action camera.

1 Open the VIRB video or image to delete.

2 Select Options > Delete File.

Starting a VIRB Video Slideshow

You can view a slideshow of the videos and images on the VIRB action camera.

1 From the VIRB® screen, select .

2 Wait a few seconds for the thumbnail images to load.

3 Select a video or image.

4 Select Options > Start Slideshow.

To stop the slideshow, selcet Options > Stop Slideshow.

VIRB Action Camera Settings

NOTE: Not all options and settings apply to all camera models.

Select Vessel > VIRB® > Options.

Name: Allows you to enter a new name for the VIRB action camera.

Recording: Starts and stops recording.

Take Photo: Takes a still photograph.

Playback: Allows you to view video recordings and photos.

Freeze: Pauses the camera image.

Sleep: Puts the VIRB action camera into a low power mode to conserve battery power. Not available on the VIRB

360 camera.

Video Setup: Sets up the video (VIRB Action Camera Video Setup Settings, page160).

Edit Overlays: Adjusts the data shown on the screen (Customizing the Data Overlays, page17).

VIRB Action Camera Video Setup Settings

NOTE: Not all options and settings apply to all camera models.

Select Vessel > VIRB® > Options > Video Setup.

Aspect: Sets the video aspect ratio.

Video Mode: Sets the video mode. For example, you can select the Slow-Mo option to shoot slow motion

videos.

Video Size: Sets the size or pixel dimensions of videos.

Video FPS: Sets the frames per second.

Video Timestamp: Adds the date and time a video was recorded.

Photo Timestamp: Adds the date and time a photo was taken.

Photo Size: Sets the size or pixel dimensions of photos.

Field of View: Sets the zoom level.

Lens Mode: Sets which lens or lenses the camera uses while shooting video.

Mirror: Allows you to flip or mirror the video.

Rotation: Allows you to rotate the camera angle.

160 Viewing Video

Adding the VIRB Action Camera Controls to Other Screens

Before you can control a VIRB action camera with the chartplotter, you must connect the devices using a

wireless connection (Connecting a Wireless Device to the Chartplotter, page27).

You can add the VIRB action camera control bar to other screens. This allows you to start and stop recording

from other functions in the chartplotter.

1 Open the screen to which you want to add the VIRB action camera control bar.

2 Select Options > Edit Overlays > Bottom Bar > VIRB Bar.

When viewing a screen that has the VIRB action camera controls, you can select to open the full screen

view of the VIRB action camera.

HDMI Out Video Considerations

NOTICE

To prevent corrosion due to moisture, you must use Garmin GPSMAP accessory cables when connecting the

chartplotter to the video display. Using different cables voids your warranty.

The GPSMAP 12x3 chartplotter models have HDMI out capability to duplicate the chartplotter screen on another

device, such as a television or monitor.

The Garmin GPSMAP HDMI accessory cable is 4.5m (15ft.) long. If you need a longer cable, you should use an

active HDMI cable only. You need an HDMI coupler to connect the two HDMI cables.

You must make all cable connections in a dry environment.

Item Description

GPSMAP 12x3 chartplotter

GPSMAP HDMI cable (HDMI OUT)

Display with an HDMI In port, such as a computer or television

Dry environment, protected from moisture

Viewing Video 161

Pairing the GC

™

100 Camera with a Garmin Chartplotter

Before you can connect a wireless device to the chartplotter wireless network, you must configure the

chartplotter Wi‑Fi network (Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network, page26).

1 With the camera within an unobstructed 76m (250ft.) of the chartplotter, quickly press three times.

2 On the chartplotter, select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices > Garmin Camera > Start.

3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Surround View Camera System

WARNING

Do not solely rely on this system for vessel docking and operation purposes.

Objects displayed by the cameras may be closer than they appear.

This system is only intended to enhance situational awareness when used properly. If used improperly, you

could become distracted by the display. Failure to pay attention to your surroundings during vessel docking and

operation could cause you to miss obstacles or hazards in or around the water, leading to an accident causing

property damage, personal injury, or death.

The surround view camera system is a set of dedicated cameras installed and configured to provide a complete

bird's-eye view of your vessel to easily see your immediate surroundings. You can also view video feeds from

any of the dedicated cameras in the system to help with maneuvering and docking.

The surround view camera system is available only on select vessels and is installed in the factory.

To view the surround view camera screen, from the home screen, select Vessel > Surround View.

Item Description Information

Bird's-eye view

The bird's-eye view is always shown on the surround view camera screen.

You can include the bird's-eye view as part of a combo with another screen, such

as a chart.

Individual camera

feeds

By default, two individual camera feeds are shown on the surround view screen.

You can customize this to show only one camera instead.

You can quickly change which cameras are shown in these feeds.

Selected camera

indicator

This indicator shows which camera is shown in the individual camera feed.

Visual bumper

You can enable and configure the visual bumper to show a line on the birds-eye

view that can help you judge how close objects are to your boat.

Distance marker

You can enable this feature to help judge distances when maneuvering or

docking.

162 Surround View Camera System

Changing a Camera

You can change which camera shows a live feed on the surround view camera screen.

1 From the surround view camera screen, touch the camera feed you want to change.

2 Touch , and touch the camera you want to view.

Viewing a Camera Feed Full Screen

You can switch to a full-screen view any of the live camera feeds.

NOTE: You can also view each of the cameras in the surround view camera system in the Video screen.

1 From the surround view camera screen, select the camera you want to view full screen.

2 Select .

The camera switches to a full-screen view, and you can zoom and pan using the controls.

To return to the surround view screen, select .

Changing the Surround View Camera Layout

You can change the layout of the surround view camera screen to show one or two separate camera feeds in

addition to the bird's-eye view.

1 From the surround view camera screen, select Options > Layout.

2 Select the layout.

Showing and Hiding the Visual Bumper

The visual bumper is an adjustable perimeter line you can set around your boat. The visual bumper appears on

the birds-eye view only, and can help you judge how close objects are to your boat.

From the surround view camera screen, select Options > Visual Bumper.

Adjusting the Visual Bumper

You must have the visual bumper shown on the bird's-eye view before you can adjust it.

1 From the surround view camera screen, select Options > Visual Bumper > .

2 Increase or decrease the range of the visual bumper line.

3 Select Back.

Showing the Distance Marker

You can show the distance marker to gain a better sense of distance when maneuvering or docking.

The distance markers shown on the bird's-eye view are determined by the cameras selected in the individual

camera feeds.

From the surround view camera screen, select Options > Distance Marker.

Renaming a Camera

You can change the name of any camera in the surround view camera system.

1 From the surround view camera screen, select Options > Rename Cameras.

2 Select the camera you want to rename.

3 Enter a new name for the camera.

4 Select Done.

Setting the Camera to Mirrored Stern View

You can set the camera to display a mirrored stern view that displays the camera view as you would view it in a

mirror, such as a rearview mirror. A mirrored stern view is useful when docking the vessel.

From the surround view camera screen, select Options > Mirror Stern Camera.

Surround View Camera System 163

Device Configuration

System Settings

Select Settings > System.

Sounds and Display: Adjusts the display settings and the audio settings (if available).

GPS: Provides information about the GPS satellites and settings.

System Information: Provides information about the devices on the network and the software version.

Station Information: Adjusts the setup of the station.

Auto Power Up: Controls which devices turn on automatically when power is applied.

Auto Power Off: Automatically turns off the system after it has been asleep for the selected length of time.

Simulator: Turns the simulator on or off and allows you to set the time, date, speed, and simulated location.

Sounds and Display Settings

Select Settings > System > Sounds and Display.

Beeper: Turns on and off the tone that sounds for alarms and selections.

Audio Setup: Sets up the audio output.

Backlight: Sets the backlight brightness. You can select the Auto option to adjust the backlight brightness

automatically based on the ambient light.

Backlight Sync: Synchronizes the backlight brightness of other chartplotters in the station.

Synchronizes the backlight brightness of the MFDs in the station and the engine displays on the engine

network.

Color Mode: Sets the device to display day or night colors. You can select the Auto option to allow the device to

set day or night colors automatically based on the time of day.

Startup Image: Sets the image that appears when you turn on the device.

Startup Layout: Sets the layout that appears when you turn on the device.

Screen Lock: Sets the anti-theft feature that requires a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) to prevent

unauthorized use of the device (Enabling Screen Lock, page14).

Audio Settings

You can adjust audible alarms, alerts, and warnings that are sounded over connected audio devices, such as a

Fusion stereo. An audio device can be connected using HDMI or the NMEA 0183 Audio Cable accessory.

Select Settings > System > Sounds and Display > Audio Setup.

Audio Output: Turns on the audio output for audio alerts.

Audio Alerts: Sets which system alarms and alerts are played over the compatible audio output. An alarm

indicates a situation could be hazardous to passengers and requires immediate action. A warning indicates

the situation could be hazardous to equipment on the vessel or the vessel itself and requires action very

soon. All other messages and information are classified as alerts.

Audio Alert Language: Sets the spoken language for alerts.

Audio Alert Device: Sets the device to control when alerts are played.

Audio Alert Source: Switches the audio device to the selected source when an alert is played.

Alert Volume: Controls the volume of the alerts.

164 Device Configuration

GPS Settings

Select Settings > System > GPS.

Skyview: Shows the relative position of GPS satellites in the sky.

GLONASS: Turns on or off GLONASS data (Russia satellite system). When the system is used in situations with

poor sky visibility, GLONASS data can be used in combination with GPS to provide more accurate position

information.

WAAS/EGNOS: Turns on or off WAAS data (in North America) or EGNOS data (in Europe), which can provide

more-accurate GPS position information. When using WAAS or EGNOS data, the device may take longer to

acquire satellites.

Galileo: Turns on or off Galileo data (European Union satellite system). When the system is used in situations

with poor sky visibility, Galileo data can be used in combination with GPS to provide more accurate position

information.

Speed Filter: Averages the speed of your vessel over a short period of time for smoother speed values.

Source: Allows you to select the preferred source for GPS data.

Station Settings

Select Settings > System > Station Information.

Change Station: Sets the entire station to a new set of defaults based on the location of this station. You can

also select to use this display as a stand-alone, individual display, instead of grouping it with other displays to

make a station.

GRID™ Pairing: Allows you to pair a GRID remote input device with this station.

Display Order: Sets the order of the displays, which is important when using a GRID remote input device.

Autopilot Enabled: Allows you to control the autopilot from this device.

Reset Layouts: Resets the layouts in this station to the factory default settings.

Reset Station Settings: Resets all station settings to on all connected devices in the station to the factory

default settings, and requires initial station setup.

Viewing System Software Information

You can view the software version, the basemap version, all supplemental map information (if applicable),

the software version for an optional Garmin radar (if applicable), and the unit ID number. You may need this

information to update the system software or to purchase additional map data information.

Select Settings > System > System Information > Software Information.

Viewing the Event Log

The event log shows a list of system events.

Select Settings > System > System Information > Event Log.

Viewing E-label Regulatory and Compliance Information

The label for this device is provided electronically. The e-label may provide regulatory information, such as

identification numbers provided by the FCC or regional compliance markings, as well as applicable product and

licensing information. Not available on all models.

1 Select Settings.

2 Select System.

3 Select Regulatory Information.

Device Configuration 165

Preferences Settings

Select Settings > Preferences.

Units: Sets units of measure.

Language: Sets the on-screen text language.

Navigation: Sets navigation preferences.

Filters: Smooths out the values shown in the data fields, which can decrease the noise or show longer term

trends. Increasing the filter setting increases the smoothing and decreasing it reduces the smoothing. A filter

setting of 0 will disable the filter and the value shown will be the raw value from the source. You can also

synchronize these settings across all devices that enable the Sync Filters setting.

Keyboard Layout: Arranges the keys on the on-screen keyboard.

Screenshot Capture: Allows the device to save images of the screen.

Menu Bar Display: Shows or automatically hides the menu bar when it is not needed.

Units Settings

Select Settings > Preferences > Units.

System Units: Sets the unit format for the device.

Variance: Sets the magnetic declination, the angle between magnetic north and true north, for your present

location.

North Reference: Sets the direction references used in calculating heading information. True sets geographic

north as the north reference. Grid sets grid north as the north reference (000º). Magnetic sets the magnetic

north as the north reference.

Position Format: Sets the position format in which a given location reading appears. Do not change this setting

unless you are using a map or chart that specifies a different position format.

Map Datum: Sets the coordinate system on which the map is structured. Do not change this setting unless you

are using a map or chart that specifies a different map datum.

Time: Sets the time format, time zone, and daylight saving time.

Navigation Settings

NOTE: Some settings and options require additional charts or hardware.

Select Settings > Preferences > Navigation.

Route Labels: Sets the type of labels shown with route turns on the map.

Turn Transition: Adjusts how the chartplotter transitions to the next turn or leg or the route. You can set the

transition to be based on time or distance before the turn. You can increase the time or distance value to help

improve the accuracy of the autopilot when navigating a route or an Auto Guidance line with many frequent

turns or at higher speeds. For straighter routes or slower speeds, lowering this value can improve autopilot

accuracy.

Speed Sources: Sets the source for the speed readings.

Auto Guidance: Sets the measurements for the Preferred Depth, Vertical Clearance, and Shoreline Distance,

when you are using some premium maps.

Route Start: Selects a starting point for route navigation.

166 Device Configuration

Auto Guidance Path Configurations

CAUTION

The Preferred Depth and Vertical Clearance settings influence how the chartplotter calculates an Auto Guidance

path. If a section of an Auto Guidance path is shallower than the Preferred Depth or lower than the Vertical

Clearance settings, the section of the Auto Guidance path appears as a solid orange line or a red striped line

in Garmin Navionics+ and Garmin Navionics Vision+ charts and appears as a magenta and gray striped line in

previous versions. When your boat enters one of those areas, a warning message appears (Route Color Coding,

page49).

NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.

NOTE: Not all settings apply to all maps.

You can set the parameters the chartplotter uses when calculating an Auto Guidance path.

Select Settings > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance.

Preferred Depth: Sets the minimum water depth, based on chart depth data, that your boat can safely travel

over.

NOTE: The minimum water depth for the premium charts (made before 2016) is 3 feet. If you enter a value of

less than 3 feet, the charts only use depths of 3 feet for Auto Guidance path calculations.

Vertical Clearance: Sets the minimum height of a bridge or obstacle, based on chart data, that your boat can

safely travel under.

Shoreline Distance: Sets how close to the shore you want the Auto Guidance path to be placed. The path

may move if you change this setting while navigating. The available values for this setting are relative, not

absolute. To ensure that path is placed the appropriate distance from shore, you can assess the placement

of the path using one or more familiar destinations that require navigation through a narrow waterway

(Adjusting the Distance from Shore, page59).

Device Configuration 167

Adjusting the Distance from Shore

The Shoreline Distance setting indicates how close to the shore you want the Auto Guidance line to be placed.

The Auto Guidance line may move if you change this setting while navigating. The available values for the

Shoreline Distance setting are relative, not absolute. To ensure the Auto Guidance line is placed the appropriate

distance from shore, you can assess the placement of the Auto Guidance line using one or more familiar

destinations that require navigation through a narrow waterway.

1 Dock your vessel or drop the anchor.

2 Select Settings > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance > Shoreline Distance > Normal.

3 Select a destination that you have navigated to previously.

4 Select Navigate To > Auto Guidance.

5 Review the placement of the Auto Guidance line, and determine whether the line safely avoids known

obstacles and the turns enable efficient travel.

6 Select an option:

• If the placement of the line is satisfactory, select Options > Navigation Options > Stop Navigation, and

proceed to step 10.

• If the line is too close to known obstacles, select Settings > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance >

Shoreline Distance > Far.

• If the turns in the line are too wide, select Settings > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance >

Shoreline Distance > Near.

7 If you selected Near or Far in step 6, review the placement of the Auto Guidance line, and determine whether

the line safely avoids known obstacles and the turns enable efficient travel.

Auto Guidance maintains a wide clearance from obstacles in open water, even if you set the Shoreline

Distance setting to Near or Nearest. As a result, the chartplotter may not reposition the Auto Guidance line,

unless the destination selected requires navigation through a narrow waterway.

8 Select an option:

• If the placement of the line is satisfactory, select Options > Navigation Options > Stop Navigation, and

proceed to step 10.

• If the line is too close to known obstacles, select Settings > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance >

Shoreline Distance > Farthest.

• If the turns in the line are too wide, select Settings > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance >

Shoreline Distance > Nearest.

9 If you selected Nearest or Farthest in step 8, review the placement of the Auto Guidance line, and determine

whether the line safely avoids known obstacles and the turns enable efficient travel.

The Auto Guidance path maintains a wide clearance from obstacles in open water, even if you set the

Shoreline Distance setting to Near or Nearest. As a result, the chartplotter may not reposition the Auto

Guidance line, unless the destination selected requires navigation through a narrow waterway.

10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 at least once more, using a different destination each time, until you are familiar

with the functionality of the Shoreline Distance setting.

168 Device Configuration

Communications Settings

NMEA 0183 Settings

Select Settings > Communications > NMEA 0183 Setup.

Port Types: See Setting the Communication Format for Each NMEA 0183 Port, page169.

Output Sentences: See Configuring NMEA 0183 Output Sentences, page169.

Position Precision: Adjusts the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for transmission of NMEA

output.

XTE Precision: Adjusts the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for NMEA crosstalk error output.

Waypoint IDs: Sets the device to transmit waypoint names or numbers using NMEA 0183 while navigating.

Using numbers may resolve compatibility issues with older NMEA 0183 autopilots.

Restore Defaults: Restores the NMEA 0183 settings to the original factory default values.

Diagnostics: Displays NMEA 0183 diagnostic information.

Configuring NMEA 0183 Output Sentences

You can enable and disable NMEA 0183 output sentences.

1 Select Settings > Communications > NMEA 0183 Setup > Output Sentences.

2 Select an option.

3 Select one or more NMEA 0183 output sentences, and select Back.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enable or disable additional output sentences.

Setting the Communication Format for Each NMEA 0183 Port

You can configure the communication format for each internal NMEA 0183 port when connecting your

chartplotter to external NMEA 0183 devices, a computer, or other Garmin devices.

1 Select Settings > Communications > NMEA 0183 Setup > Port Types.

2 Select an input or output port.

3 Select a format:

• To support the input or output of standard NMEA 0183 data, DSC, and sonar NMEA input support for the

DPT, MTW, and VHW sentences, select NMEA Std..

• To support the input or output of standard NMEA 0183 data for most AIS receivers, select NMEA High

Speed.

• To support the input or output of Garmin proprietary data for interfacing with Garmin software, select

Garmin.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to configure additional input or output ports.

NMEA 2000 Settings

Select Settings > Communications > NMEA 2000 Setup.

Device List: Displays the devices connected to the network and allows you to set options for some transducers

connected using the NMEA 2000 network.

Label Devices: Changes the labels for available connected devices.

Naming Devices and Sensors on the Network

You can name devices and sensors connected to the Garmin Marine Network and the NMEA 2000 network.

1 Select Settings > Communications.

2 Select Marine Network or NMEA 2000 Setup > Device List.

3 Select a device from the list on the left.

4 Select Change Name.

5 Enter the name, and select Done.

Device Configuration 169

Garmin Marine Network

The Garmin Marine Network allows you to share data from Garmin peripheral devices with chartplotters quickly

and easily. You can connect a device to the Garmin Marine Network to receive data from and share data with

other devices and chartplotters that are compatible with the Garmin Marine Network.

Select Settings > Communications > Marine Network.

Setting Alarms

CAUTION

The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page164). Failure

to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.

Navigation Alarms

Select Settings > Alarms > Navigation.

Arrival: Sets an alarm to sound when you are within a specified distance or time from a turn or a destination.

Anchor Drag: Sets an alarm to sound when you exceed a specified drift distance while anchored.

Off Course: Sets an alarm to sound when you are off course by a specified distance.

Boundary Alarms: Disables and enables all boundary alarms.

Setting the Anchor Drag Alarm

You can set an alarm to sound if you have moved more than an allowable distance. This is very useful when

anchoring overnight.

1 Select Settings > Alarms > Navigation > Anchor Drag.

2 Select Alarm to turn on the alarm.

3 Select Set Radius, and select a distance on the chart.

4 Select Back.

170 Device Configuration

System Alarms

Select Settings > Alarms > System.

Unit Voltage: Sets an alarm to sound when the battery reaches a specified low voltage.

GPS Accuracy: Sets an alarm to sound when the GPS location accuracy falls outside the user-defined value.

Sonar Alarms

WARNING

The sonar alarms feature is a tool for situational awareness only and may not prevent grounding in all

circumstances. It is your obligation to ensure safe operation of the vessel.

CAUTION

The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page164). Failure

to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.

NOTE: Not all options are available on all transducers.

From an applicable sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Alarms.

You can also open the sonar alarms by selecting Settings > Alarms > Sonar.

Shallow Water: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth is less than the specified value.

Deep Water: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth is greater than the specified value.

FrontVü Alarm: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth in front of the vessel is less than the specified value,

which can help you avoid running aground (Setting the FrontVü Depth Alarm, page91). This alarm is available

only with Panoptix FrontVü transducers.

Water Temp.: Sets an alarm to sound when the transducer reports a temperature that is 2°F (1.1°C) above or

below the specified temperature.

Contour: Sets an alarm to sound when the transducer detects a suspended target within the specified depth

from the surface of the water and from the bottom.

Fish: Sets an alarm to sound when the device detects a suspended target.

• sets the alarm to sound when fish of all sizes are detected.

• sets the alarm to sound only when medium or large fish are detected.

• sets the alarm to sound only when large fish are detected.

Setting Weather Alarms

Before you can set weather alarms, you must have a compatible chartplotter connected to a weather device,

such as a GXM device, and have a valid weather subscription.

1 Select Settings > Alarms > Weather.

2 Turn on alarms for specific weather events.

Setting the Fuel Alarm

CAUTION

The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page164). Failure

to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.

Before you can set a fuel level alarm, you must connect a compatible fuel flow sensor to the chartplotter.

You can set an alarm to sound when the total amount of remaining onboard fuel reaches the level you specify.

1 Select Settings > Alarms > Fuel > Set Total Fuel Onboard > On.

2 Enter the remaining amount of fuel that triggers the alarm, and select Done.

Device Configuration 171

My Vessel Settings

NOTE: Some settings and options require additional charts or hardware.

Select Settings > My Vessel.

Transducers: Shows all transducers on the network, allows you to change transducers, and allows you to view

diagnostic information (Selecting the Transducer Type, page80).

Depth and Anchoring: Allows you to enter information about the keel (Setting the Keel Offset, page67) and the

anchor.

The Anchor Height value is the height of the anchor above the waterline. The Anchor Scope value is the ratio

of the length of anchor rode in use to the vertical distance from the bow of the vessel to the bottom of the

water. These anchor settings are used to calculate the Target Anchor Rode date field.

Temp. Offset: Allows you to set an offset value to compensate for the water temperature reading from a NMEA

0183 water-temperature sensor or a temperature-capable transducer (Setting the Water Temperature Offset,

page174).

Calibrate Water Speed: Calibrates the speed-sensing transducer or sensor (Calibrating a Water-Speed Device,

page174).

Fuel: Sets the combined fuel capacity and fuel remaining in the fuel tanks on your vessel (Fuel Settings,

page174).

Vessel Type: Enables some chartplotter features based on the boat type.

Switching: Sets the digital switching circuits, such as SeaStar

and CZone

™

devices.

Polar Table: Enables polar table data, when the vessel type is not a powerboat.

System Profiles: Allows you to save your system profile to a memory card and import system profile settings

from a memory card. This can be helpful for charter or fleet vessels, and for sharing your setup information

with a friend.

Hull ID Number: Allows you to enter the Hull Identification Number (HIN).The HIN might be permanently affixed

to the upper starboard side of the transom or outboard side.

Optimus Steering: Allows you to adjust the Optimus steering parameters.

172 Device Configuration

Setting the Keel Offset

You can enter a keel offset to compensate the water depth reading for the transducer installation location. This

allows you to view the depth of the water below the keel or the true depth of the water, depending on your

needs.

If you want to know the water depth below the keel or the lowest point of your boat and the transducer is

installed at the water line or anywhere above the end of the keel, measure the distance from the transducer

location to the keel of the boat.

If you want to know the true water depth and the transducer is installed below the water line, measure the

distance from the bottom of the transducer up to the water line.

NOTE: This option is only available when you have valid depth data.

1 Measure the distance:

• If the transducer is installed at the water line or anywhere above the end of the keel, measure the

distance from the transducer location to the keel of the boat. Enter this value as a positive number.

• If the transducer is installed at the bottom of the keel and you want to know the true depth of the

water, measure the distance from the transducer to the water line. Enter this value in as a negative

number.

2 Complete an action:

• If the transducer is connected to the chartplotter or a sonar module, select Settings > My Vessel > Depth

and Anchoring > Keel Offset.

• If the transducer is connected to the NMEA 2000 network, select Settings > Communications > NMEA

2000 Setup > Device List, select the transducer, and select Review > Keel Offset.

3 Select if the transducer is installed at the water line, or select if the transducer is installed at the

bottom of the keel.

4 Enter the distance measured in step 1.

Device Configuration 173

Setting the Water Temperature Offset

The temperature offset compensates for the temperature reading from a temperature sensor or temperature-

capable transducer.

1 Measure the water temperature using the temperature sensor or temperature-capable transducer that is

connected to the network.

2 Measure the water temperature using a different temperature sensor or a thermometer that is known to be

accurate.

3 Subtract the water temperature measured in step 1 from the water temperature measured in step 2.

This value is the temperature offset. Enter this value in step 5 as a positive number if the sensor measures

the water temperature as being colder than it actually is. Enter this value in step 5 as a negative number if the

sensor measures the water temperature as being warmer than it actually is.

4 Complete an action:

• If the sensor or transducer is connected to the chartplotter or a sonar module, select Settings > My Vessel

> Temp. Offset.

• If the sensor or transducer is connected to the NMEA 2000 network, select Settings > Communications >

NMEA 2000 Setup > Device List, select the transducer, and select Review > Temp. Offset.

5 Enter the temperature offset value calculated in step 3.

Fuel Settings

Select Settings > My Vessel > Fuel.

Fuel Remaining: Allows you to use fuel flow sensors or fuel tank level sensors to monitor the fuel remaining on

the vessel. The Fuel Flow option uses fuel flow sensors. The Fuel Tank option uses fuel tank level sensors.

Fuel Tank Capacity: Allows you to enter the fuel capacity of each fuel tank onboard. This setting is available

when the Fuel Remaining setting is set to the Fuel Tank option. The chartplotter uses information from the

tank level sensors, so you do not need to do manually enter fuel information after you fill up the tanks.

Fuel Capacity: Allows you to enter the total fuel capacity of all fuel tanks onboard. This setting is available when

the Fuel Remaining setting is set to the Fuel Flow option. After you fill up your tanks with fuel, you must enter

fuel information manually using one of the options below.

• If you have filled up all the fuel tanks on the vessel, select Fill Up All Tanks. The fuel level is set to

maximum capacity.

• If you have added less than a full tank of fuel, select Add Fuel to Boat, and enter the amount added.

• To specify the total fuel in the vessel tanks, select Set Total Fuel Onboard, and enter the total amount of

fuel in the tanks.

Calibrating a Water-Speed Device

If you have a speed sensor or a speed-sensing transducer connected, you can calibrate that speed-sensing

device to improve the accuracy of water-speed data displayed by the chartplotter.

1 Complete an action:

• If the sensor or transducer is connected to the chartplotter or a sonar module, select Settings > My Vessel

> Calibrate Water Speed.

• If the sensor or transducer is connected to the NMEA 2000 network, select Settings > Communications >

NMEA 2000 Setup > Device List, select the transducer, and select Review > Calibrate Water Speed.

2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

If the boat is not moving fast enough or the speed sensor is not registering a speed, a message appears.

3 Select OK, and safely increase the boat speed.

4 If the message appears again, stop the boat, and ensure the speed-sensor wheel is not stuck.

5 If the wheel turns freely, check the cable connections.

6 If you continue to get the message, contact Garmin product support.

174 Device Configuration

Other Vessels Settings

CAUTION

The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page164). Failure

to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.

When your compatible chartplotter is connected to an AIS device or VHF radio, you can set up how other

vessels are displayed on the chartplotter.

Select Settings > Other Vessels.

AIS: Enables and disables AIS signal reception.

DSC: Enables and disables digital selective calling (DSC).

Collision Alarm: Sets the collision alarm (Setting the Safe-Zone Collision Alarm, page37).

AIS-EPIRB Test: Enables test signals from Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacons (EPRIB).

AIS-MOB Test: Enables test signals from man overboard (MOB) devices.

AIS-SART Test: Enables test transmissions from Search and Rescue Transponders (SART).

Settings that are Synced on the Garmin Marine Network

Garmin ECHOMAP

™

and GPSMAP chartplotters sync certain settings when connected to the Garmin Marine

Network.

The following settings are synced, if applicable, to the device.

Alarm Settings (also syncs alarm acknowledgment):

• Arrival

• Anchor Drag

• Off Course

• GPS Accuracy

• Shallow Water

• Deep Water (Not available in the GPSMAP 8400/8600 series)

• Water Temp.

• Contour (Not available in echoMAP 70s and GPSMAP 507/701 series)

• Fish

• Collision Alarm

General Settings:

• Auto Guidance Preferred Depth

• Auto Guidance Vertical Clearance

• Beeper

• Color Mode

• Keyboard Layout

• Language

• Map Datum

• Heading

• Position Format

• System Units

• Calibrate Water Speed

• Radar Antenna Size

Chart Settings:

• Chart Borders

• Hazard Colors

• Heading Line

Device Configuration 175

• Land POIs

• Light Sectors

• Navaid Size

• Navaid Type

• Photo Points

• Preferred Depth

• Shallow Shading

• Service Points

• Vessel Icon (Cannot be synced between all models)

Restoring the Original Chartplotter Factory Settings

NOTE: This affects all devices on the network.

1 Select Settings > System > System Information > Reset.

2 Select an option:

• To reset the device settings to the factory default values, select Reset Default Settings. This restores the

default configuration settings, but does not remove saved user data, maps, or software updates.

• To reset all settings in all devices in the station to the factory default values, select Reset Station

Settings. This restores the default configuration settings, but does not remove saved user data, maps, or

software updates

• To clear saved data, such as waypoints and routes, select Delete User Data. This does not affect maps or

software updates.

• To clear saved data and reset device settings to the factory default values, disconnect the chartplotter

from the Garmin Marine Network, and select Delete Data and Reset Settings. This does not affect maps

or software updates.

Sharing and Managing User Data

WARNING

This feature allows you to import data from other devices that may have been generated by third parties.

Garmin makes no representations about the accuracy, completeness, or timeliness of data that is generated by

third parties. Any reliance on or use of such data is at your own risk.

You can share user data between compatible devices. User data includes waypoints, saved tracks, routes, and

boundaries.

• You can share data across the Garmin Marine Network.

• You can share and manage user data using a memory card. You must have a memory card installed in the

device. This device supports up to a 32 GB memory card, formatted to FAT32.

Selecting a File Type for Third-Party Waypoints and Routes

You can import and export waypoints and routes from third-party devices.

1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.

2 Select Info > User Data > Data Transfer > File Type.

3 Select GPX.

To transfer data with Garmin devices again, select the ADM file type.

176 Sharing and Managing User Data

Copying User Data from a Memory Card

You can transfer user data from a memory card to transfer from other devices. User data includes waypoints,

routes, Auto Guidance paths, tracks, and boundaries.

NOTE: Only boundary files with an .adm extension are supported.

1 Insert a memory card into a card slot.

2 Select Info > User Data > Data Transfer.

3 If necessary, select the memory card to copy data to.

4 Select an option:

• To transfer data from the memory card to the chartplotter and combine it with existing user data, select

Merge from Card.

• To transfer data from the memory card to the chartplotter and overwrite existing user data, select Replace

from Card.

5 Select the file name.

Copying User Data to a Memory Card

You can save user data to a memory card to transfer to other devices. User data includes waypoints, routes,

Auto Guidance paths, tracks, and boundaries.

1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.

2 Select Info > User Data > Data Transfer > Save to Card.

3 If necessary, select the memory card to copy the data to.

4 Select an option:

• To create a new file, select Add New File, and enter a name.

• To add the information to an existing file, select the file from the list, and select Save to Card.

Updating Built-In Maps with a Memory Card and Garmin Express

You can update the built-in maps using the Garmin Express computer application and a memory card.

1 Insert a memory card into the computer's card slot (Memory Cards, page9).

2 Open the Garmin Express application.

If you do not have the Garmin Express application installed on your computer, you can download it from

garmin.com/express.

3 If necessary, register your device (Registering Your Device Using the Garmin Express App, page180).

4 Click Vessel > View Details.

5 Click Download next to the map to update.

6 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the download.

7 Wait while the update downloads.

The update may take an extended period of time.

8 After the download is complete, eject the card from the computer.

9 Insert the memory card into the card slot (Memory Cards, page9).

10 On the chartplotter, select Settings > System > System Information > Update Built-In Map.

The updated chart appears on your chartplotter.

Sharing and Managing User Data 177

Backing Up Data to a Computer

1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.

2 Select Info > User Data > Data Transfer > Save to Card.

3 Select a file name from the list, or select Add New File.

4 Select Save to Card.

5 Remove the memory card, and insert it into a card reader attached to a computer.

6 Open the Garmin\UserData folder on the memory card.

7 Copy the backup file on the card and paste it to any location on the computer.

Restoring Backup Data to a Chartplotter

1 Insert a memory card into a card reader that is attached to the computer.

2 Copy a backup file from the computer to the memory card, into a folder named Garmin\UserData.

3 Insert a memory card into the card slot.

4 Select Info > User Data > Data Transfer > Replace from Card.

Saving System Information to a Memory Card

You can save system information to a memory card as a troubleshooting tool. A product support representative

may ask you to use this information to retrieve data about the network.

1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.

2 Select Settings > System > System Information > Garmin Devices > Save to Card.

3 If necessary, select the memory card to save system information to.

4 Remove the memory card.

178 Sharing and Managing User Data

Appendix

ActiveCaptain and Garmin Express

The ActiveCaptain and Garmin Express apps help you manage your Garmin chartplotter and other devices.

ActiveCaptain: The ActiveCaptain mobile app provides an easy-to-use connection between your compatible

mobile device and your compatible Garmin chartplotter, charts, and the Garmin Quickdraw Contours

Community (ActiveCaptain App, page21). The app allows you to monitor and track your boat with the

OnDeck

™

system. The app provides unlimited access to your cartography and a quick, mobile way to

download new charts using the OneChart

™

feature, provides a link to receive notifications on your chartplotter,

and provides access to the ActiveCaptain Community for feedback on marinas and other boating points of

interest. You can also use the app to plan your trip and sync user data. The app checks your devices for

available updates, and notifies you when an update is available. You can even control the chartplotter using

the Garmin Helm feature.

Garmin Express: The Garmin Express desktop app allows you to use your computer and a memory card to

download and update Garmin chartplotter software and charts (Garmin Express App, page179). You should

use the Garmin Express app for faster data transfer of larger downloads and updates, and to avoid possible

data charges with some mobile devices.

Function

ActiveCaptain

mobile app

Garmin Express

desktop app

Update your Garmin chartplotter software Yes Yes

Update your Garmin charts Yes Yes

Download new Garmin charts Yes Yes

Access the Garmin Quickdraw Contours Community to download

and share contours with other users

Yes No

Monitor and track your boat with the OnDeck system Yes No

Sync a mobile device with your Garmin chartplotter Yes No

Access the ActiveCaptain Community for feedback on marinas and

boating points of interest

Yes No

Receive smart notification on the chartplotter Yes No

Control the chartplotter with Garmin Helm Yes No

Garmin Express App

The Garmin Express desktop app allows you to use your computer and a memory card to download and update

Garmin device software and charts and register your devices. We recommend it for larger downloads and

updates for faster data transfer and to avoid possible data charges with some mobile devices.

Installing the Garmin Express App on a Computer

You can install the Garmin Express app on a Windows

or Mac

computer.

1 Go to garmin.com/express.

2 Select Download for Windows or Download for Mac.

3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Appendix 179

Registering Your Device Using the Garmin Express App

NOTE: You should use the ActiveCaptain app and a mobile device to register the device (Getting Started with the

ActiveCaptain App, page22).

Help us better support you by completing our online registration today. Keep the original sales receipt, or a

photocopy, in a safe place.

1 Install the Garmin Express app on your computer (Installing the Garmin Express App on a Computer,

page179).

2 Insert a memory card into the card slot (Memory Cards, page9).

3 Wait a few moments.

The chartplotter opens the card management page and creates a file named GarminDevice.xml in the

Garmin folder on the memory card.

4 Remove the memory card from your device.

5 Open the Garmin Express app on your computer.

6 Insert the memory card into your computer.

7 If necessary, select Get Started.

8 If necessary, while the application searches, select Sign In next to Have marine charts or devices? near the

bottom of the screen.

9 Create or sign in to your Garmin account.

10 Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your vessel.

11 Select > Add.

The Garmin Express application searches the memory card for the device information.

12 Select Add Device to register the device.

When registration is complete, the Garmin Express application searches for additional charts and chart

updates for your device.

When you add devices to the chartplotter network, repeat these steps to register the new devices using the

Garmin Express app.

180 Appendix

Updating Your Charts Using the Garmin Express App

This device supports up to a 32 GB memory card, formatted to FAT32 with speed class 4 or higher. Use of

an 8 GB or larger memory card with speed class 10 is recommended. An 8GB memory card is included with

GPSMAP 7x3/9x3/12x3 models.

Downloading the chart update may take up to a few hours.

You should use a blank memory card for chart updates. The update process erases the content on the card and

reformats the card.

1 Install the Garmin Express app on your computer (Installing the Garmin Express App on a Computer,

page179).

2 Open the Garmin Express app on your computer.

3 Select your vessel and device.

4 If chart updates are available, select Chart Updates > Continue.

5 Read and agree to the terms.

6 Insert your chartplotter chart memory card into the computer.

7 Select the drive for the memory card.

8 Review the reformat warning, and select OK.

9 Wait while the chart update is copied to the memory card.

NOTE: Copying the update file onto the card may take from a few minutes up to a few hours.

10 Close the Garmin Express app.

11 Eject the memory card from the computer.

12 Turn on the chartplotter.

13 After the home screen appears, insert the memory card into the card slot.

NOTE: In order for the update instructions to appear, the device must be fully booted before the card is

inserted.

14 Select Update Software > Yes.

15 Wait several minutes while the update process completes.

16 When prompted, leave the memory card in place, and restart the chartplotter.

17 Remove the memory card.

NOTE: If the memory card is removed before the device restarts fully, the update is not complete.

Software Updates

You may need to update the software when you install a new device or add an accessory.

You can use the ActiveCaptain mobile app to update the device software (Updating Software with the

ActiveCaptain App, page24).

You can also use the Garmin Express desktop app to update your chartplotter software (Loading the New

Software on a Memory Card Using Garmin Express, page182).

This device supports up to a 32 GB memory card, formatted to FAT32 with speed class 4 or higher. Use of

an 8 GB or larger memory card with speed class 10 is recommended. An 8GB memory card is included with

GPSMAP 7x3/9x3/12x3 models.

Before you update the software, you should check the software version installed on your device (Viewing System

Software Information, page165). Then, you can go to garmin.com/support/software/marine.html, select See

All Devices in this Bundle, and compare the installed software version to the software version listed for your

product.

If the software version installed on your device is older than the version listed on the website, you should update

the software using the ActiveCaptain mobile app (Updating Software with the ActiveCaptain App, page24) or the

Garmin Express desktop app (Loading the New Software on a Memory Card Using Garmin Express, page182).

Appendix 181

Loading the New Software on a Memory Card Using Garmin Express

You can copy the software update to a memory card using a computer with the Garmin Express app.

This device supports up to a 32 GB memory card, formatted to FAT32 with speed class 4 or higher. Use of

an 8 GB or larger memory card with speed class 10 is recommended. An 8GB memory card is included with

GPSMAP 7x3/9x3/12x3 models.

Downloading the software update may take from a few minutes up to a few hours.

You should use a blank memory card for software updates. The update process erases the content on the card

and reformats the card.

1 Insert a memory card into the card slot on the computer.

2 Install the Garmin Express app (Installing the Garmin Express App on a Computer, page179).

3 Select your vessel and device.

4 Select Software Updates > Continue.

5 Read and agree to the terms.

6 Select the drive for the memory card.

7 Review the reformat warning, and select Continue.

8 Wait while the software update is copied to the memory card.

NOTE: Copying the update file onto the card may take from a few minutes up to a few hours.

9 Close the Garmin Express app.

10 Eject the memory card from the computer.

After loading the update onto the memory card, install the software on the chartplotter (Updating the Device

Software Using a Memory Card, page182).

Updating the Device Software Using a Memory Card

To update the software using a memory card, you must obtain a software-update memory card or load the

latest software onto a memory card using the Garmin Express app (Loading the New Software on a Memory

Card Using Garmin Express, page182).

1 Turn on the chartplotter.

2 After the home screen appears, insert the memory card into the card slot.

NOTE: In order for the software update instructions to appear, the device must be fully booted before the

card is inserted.

3 Select Install Now > Update Software > Yes.

4 Wait several minutes while the software update process completes.

5 When prompted, leave the memory card in place, and restart the chartplotter.

6 Remove the memory card.

NOTE: If the memory card is removed before the device restarts fully, the software update is not complete.

Cleaning the Screen

NOTICE

Cleaners containing ammonia will harm the anti-reflective coating.

The device is coated with a special anti-reflective coating which is very sensitive to waxes and abrasive

cleaners.

1 Apply an eyeglass lens cleaner specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings to the cloth.

2 Gently wipe the screen with a soft, clean, lint-free cloth.

182 Appendix

Viewing Images on a Memory card

You can view images that are saved on a memory card. You can view .jpg, .png, and .bmp files.

1 Insert a memory card with image files into the card slot.

2 Select Info > Image Viewer.

3 Select the folder containing the images.

4 Wait a few seconds for the thumbnail images to load.

5 Select an image.

6 Use the arrows to scroll through the images.

7 If necessary, select Options > Start Slideshow.

Screenshots

You can capture a screenshot of any screen shown on your chartplotter as a .png file. You can transfer the

screenshot to your computer. You can also view the screenshot in the image viewer (Viewing Images on a

Memory card, page183).

Capturing Screenshots

1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.

2 Select Settings > Preferences > Screenshot Capture > On.

3 Go to a screen you want to capture.

4 Hold or for at least six seconds.

Copying Screenshots to a Computer

1 Remove the memory card from the chartplotter, and insert it into a card reader that is attached to a

computer.

2 From Windows Explorer, open the Garmin\scrn folder on the memory card.

3 Copy the image file from the card and paste it to any location on the computer.

Troubleshooting

My device will not acquire GPS signals

If the device is not acquiring satellite signals, there could be a few causes. If the device has moved a large

distance since the last time it has acquired satellites or has been turned off for longer than a few weeks or

months, the device may not be able to acquire the satellites correctly.

• Ensure the device is using the latest software. If not, update the device software (Software Updates,

page181).

• Make sure the device has a clear view of the sky so the antenna can receive the GPS signal. If it is mounted

inside of a cabin, it should be close to a window so it can receive the GPS signal.

Appendix 183

My device will not turn on or keeps turning off

Devices erratically turning off or not turning on could indicate an issue with the power supplied to the device.

Check these items to attempt to troubleshoot the cause of the power issue.

• Make sure the power source is generating power.

You can check this several ways. For example, you can check whether other devices powered by the source

are functioning.

• Check the fuse in the power cable.

The fuse should be located in a holder that is part of the red wire of the power cable. Check that the proper

size fuse is installed. Refer to the label on the cable or the installation instructions for the exact fuse size

needed. Check the fuse to make sure there is still a connection inside of the fuse. You can test the fuse using

a multimeter. If the fuse is good, the multimeter reads 0ohm.

• Check to make sure the device is receiving at least 12Vdc.

To check the voltage, measure the female power and ground sockets of the power cable for DC voltage. If the

voltage is less than 12Vdc, the device will not turn on.

• If the device is receiving enough power but does not turn on, contact Garmin product support.

My device is not creating waypoints in the correct location

You can manually enter a waypoint location to transfer and share data from one device to the next. If you have

manually entered a waypoint using coordinates, and the location of the point does not appear where the point

should be, the map datum and position format of the device may not match the map datum and position format

originally used to mark the waypoint.

Position format is the way in which the GPS receiver's position appears on the screen. This is commonly

displayed as latitude/longitude in degrees and minutes, with options for degrees, minutes and second, degrees

only, or one of several grid formats.

Map datum is a math model which depicts a part of the surface of the earth. Latitude and longitude lines on a

paper map are referenced to a specific map datum.

1 Find out which map datum and position format was used when the original waypoint was created.

If the original waypoint was taken from a map, there should be a legend on the map that lists the map datum

and position format used to create that map. Most often this is found near the map key.

2 Select Settings > Preferences > Units.

3 Select the correct map datum and position format settings.

4 Create the waypoint again.

184 Appendix

Specifications

GPSMAP 7x2 Plus Specifications

Dimensions (W × H × D) 224.7 × 142.2 × 54.0mm (8

× 5

× 2

in.)

Dimensions with cover on bail mount (W × H × D) 257.1 × 162.0 × 83.1mm (10

× 6

× 3

)

Clearance to next obstruction behind chartplotter 84.3mm (3

in.)

Display size (W × H)

155.1× 86.9mm (6

× 3

in.)

177.8mm (7in.) diagonal

Display resolution WVGA, 800 × 480 pixels

Weight 0.86kg (1.9lb.)

Compass-safe distance 71cm (28 in.)

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX7

Fuse 6A, 125V fast-acting

Input voltage From 10 to 32Vdc

Max. power usage at 10Vdc 24W

Typical current draw at 12Vdc 1.5A

Max. current draw at 12Vdc 2.0A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 draw 75mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Wireless frequency 2.4GHz @ 17.6dBm maximum

Memory card 2 SD card slots; 32 GB max. card size

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm

™

integration (Plus models only)

The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1m for up to 30min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Appendix 185

GPSMAP 9x2 Plus Specifications

Dimensions (W × H × D) 256.4 × 16.2 × 5.2mm (10

× 6.4 × 2.1in.)

Dimensions with cover on bail mount (W × H × D) 289.4 × 181.1 × 73.8mm (11

× 7

× 2

Clearance to next obstruction behind chartplotter 82.9mm (3

in.)

Display size (W × H)

19.6 × 11.4cm (7.7 × 4.5in.)

228.7mm (9in.) diagonal

Display resolution WSVGA, 1024 × 600 pixels

Weight

9x2: 1.14kg (2.5lb.)

9x2 Plus: 1.27kg (2.8lb.)

Compass-safe distance 76cm (30 in.)

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX7

Fuse 6A, 125V fast-acting

Input voltage From 10 to 32Vdc

Max. power usage at 10Vdc 27W

Typical current draw at 12Vdc 1.3A

Max. current draw at 12Vdc 2.3A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 draw 75mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Wireless frequency 2.4GHz @ 17.6dBm maximum

Memory card 2 SD card slots; 32 GB max. card size

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration (Plus models only)

The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1m for up to 30min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

186 Appendix

GPSMAP 12x2 Plus Specifications

Dimensions (W × H × D) 329.7 × 227.3 × 77.2 mm (13 × 8

× 3

in.)

Clearance to next obstruction behind chartplotter 125mm (4

in.)

Display size (W × H)

262.1 × 164.2mm (10

× 6

in.)

12in. diagonal

Display resolution WXGA, 1280 × 800 pixels

Weight 2.72kg (6.0lb.)

Compass-safe distance 65cm (25.6in.)

Clearance to nearest obstruction 9.5cm (3

in.)

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX7

Fuse 6A, 125V fast-acting

Input voltage From 10 to 32Vdc

Max. power usage at 10Vdc 36W

Typical current draw at 12Vdc 2.5A

Max. current draw at 12Vdc 3.0A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 Draw 75mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Memory card 2 SD card slots; 32GB max. card size

Wireless frequency 2.4GHz @ 19.5dBm maximum

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration (Plus models only)

The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1m for up to 30min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Appendix 187

GPSMAP 7x3 Specifications

Dimensions (W × H × D) 192.3 × 140.3 × 74.1mm (7

× 5

× 2

in.)

Dimensions with cover on bail mount (W × H × D) 200.2 × 156.3 × 101.2mm ( 7

× 6

× 4in.)

Clearance to next obstruction behind chartplotter 27.8mm (2in.)

Display size (W × H)

154.6 × 91.0mm (6

× 3

in.)

17.8cm (7.0in.) diagonal

Display resolution WSVGA, 1024 × 600 pixels

Weight 1.3kg (2.8lb.)

Compass-safe distance 35cm (13.78in.)

Max. power usage at 10Vdc

Non-sonar models: 17.6W

Sonar models: 35.9W

Typical current draw at 12Vdc

Non-sonar models: 1.08A

Sonar models: 1.18A

Max. current draw at 12Vdc

Non-sonar models: 1.45A

Sonar models: 2.96A

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX7

Input voltage From 10 to 32Vdc

Fuse 6A, 125V fast-acting

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 draw 75mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Wireless frequency 2.4GHz @ 17.6dBm maximum

Memory card 2 microSD card slots; 32GB max. card size

The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1m for up to 30min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

188 Appendix

GPSMAP 9x3 Specifications

Dimensions (W × H × D) 233.0 × 162.3 × 75.8mm (9

× 6

× 3in.)

Dimensions with cover on bail mount (W × H × D) 256.2 × 178.1 ×104.7mm (10

x 7 x 4

in.)

Clearance to next obstruction behind chartplotter 33.2mm (1

in.)

Display size (W × H)

198.7 × 111.8mm (7

× 4

in.)

22.9cm (9.0in.) diagonal

Display resolution WXGA, 1280 ×720 pixels

Weight 1.6kg (3.6lb.)

Compass-safe distance 30cm (11.81in.)

Max. power usage at 10Vdc

Non-sonar models: 22.0W

Sonar models: 40.2W

Typical current draw at 12Vdc

Non-sonar models: 1.34A

Sonar models: 1.37A

Max. current draw at 12Vdc

Non-sonar models: 1.78A

Sonar models: 3.20A

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX7

Input voltage From 10 to 32Vdc

Fuse 6A, 125V fast-acting

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 draw 75mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Wireless frequency 2.4GHz @ 17.6dBm maximum

Memory card 2 microSD card slots; 32GB max. card size

The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1m for up to 30min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Appendix 189

GPSMAP 12x3 Specifications

Dimensions (W × H × D) 308.3 × 227.6 × 81.8mm (12

× 8

× 3

in.)

Dimensions with cover on bail mount (W × H × D) 327.2 × 246.3 × 113.8mm (12

× 9

× 4

in.)

Clearance to next obstruction behind chartplotter 93.6mm (3

in.)

Display size (W × H)

262.1 × 164.2mm (10

× 6

in.)

30.7cm (12.1in.) diagonal

Display resolution WXGA, 1280 × 800 pixels

Weight 3.0kg (6.6lb.)

Compass-safe distance 45cm (17.72in.)

Max. power usage at 10Vdc

Non-sonar models: 26.5W

Sonar models: 43.0W

Typical current draw at 12Vdc

Non-sonar models: 1.67A

Sonar models: 1.68A

Max. current draw at 12Vdc

Non-sonar models: 2.15A

Sonar models: 3.56A

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX7

Input voltage From 10 to 32Vdc

Fuse 6A, 125V fast-acting

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 draw 75mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Wireless frequency 2.4GHz @ 17.6dBm maximum

Memory card 2 microSD card slots; 32GB max. card size

The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1m for up to 30min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

190 Appendix

Sonar Models Specifications

Specification Measurement

Sonar frequencies

Traditional: 50/200, 77/200, 83/200kHz

Single Channel CHIRP: from 40 to 250kHz

Garmin ClearVü CHIRP: 260/455/800kHz

Ultra High-Definition Garmin ClearVü: 0.8Mhz (800kHz), CHIRP range: 760 to

880kHz

Ultra High-Definition SideVü: 1.2 MHz (1,200kHz), CHIRP range: 1,060 to 1,170kHz

Sonar transmit power

(RMS)

CHIRP: 1000W

Garmin ClearVü and SideVü CHIRP: 500W

Sonar depth

5,000ft. at 1kW

Dependent upon the transducer.

Dependent upon the transducer rating and depth.

Dependent upon the transducer, water salinity, bottom type, and other water conditions.

Appendix 191

NMEA 2000 PGN Information

Transmit and Receive

PGN Description

059392 ISO acknowledgment

059904 ISO request

060160 ISO transport protocol: Data transfer

060416 ISO transport protocol: Connection management

060928 ISO address claimed

065240 Commanded address

126208 Request group function

126996 Product information

126998 Configuration information

127237 Heading/track control

127245 Rudder

127250 Vessel heading

127258 Magnetic variance

127488 Engine parameters: Rapid update

127489 Engine parameters: Dynamic

127493 Transmission parameters: Dynamic

127505 Fluid level

127508 Battery status

128259 Speed: Water referenced

128267 Water depth

129025 Position: Rapid update

129026 COG and SOG: Rapid update

129029 GNSS position data

129283 Cross track error

129284 Navigation data

129539 GNSS DOPs

129540 GNSS satellites in view

130060 Label

130306 Wind data

130310 Environmental parameters (obsolete)

130311 Environmental parameters (obsolete)

192 Appendix

PGN Description

130312 Temperature (obsolete)

Transmit

PGN Description

126464 Transmit and receive PGN list group function

126984 Alert Response

127497 Trip parameters: Engine

Receive

PGN Description

065030 Generator average basic AC quantities (GAAC)

126983 Alert

126985 Alert text

126987 Alert threshold

126988 Alert value

126992 System time

127251 Rate of turn

127252 Heave

127257 Attitude

127498 Engine parameters: Static

127503 AC input status (obsolete)

127504 AC output status (obsolete)

127506 DC detailed status

127507 Charger status

127509 Inverter status

128000 Nautical leeway angle

128275 Distance log

129038 AIS class A position report

129039 AIS class B position report

129040 AIS class B extended position report

129044 Datum

129285 Navigation: Route, waypoint information

129794 AIS class A static and voyage related data

129798 AIS SAR aircraft position report

Appendix 193

PGN Description

129799 Radio frequency/mode/power

129802 AIS safety-related broadcast message

129808 DSC call Information

129809 AIS class B "CS" static data report, part A

129810 AIS class B "CS" static data report, part B

130313 Humidity

130314 Actual pressure

130316 Temperature: Extended range

130576 Trim tab status

130577 Direction data

194 Appendix

NMEA 0183 Information

Transmit

Sentence Description

GPAPB APB: Heading or track controller (autopilot) sentence "B"

GPBOD BOD: Bearing (origin to destination)

GPBWC BWC: Bearing and distance to waypoint

GPGGA GGA: Global positioning system fix data

GPGLL GLL: Geographic position (latitude and longitude)

GPGSA GSA: GNSS DOP and active satellites

GPGSV GSV: GNSS satellites in view

GPRMB RMB: Recommended minimum navigation information

GPRMC RMC: Recommended minimum specific GNSS data

GPRTE RTE: Routes

GPVTG VTG: Course over ground and ground speed

GPWPL WPL: Waypoint location

GPXTE XTE: Cross track error

PGRME E: Estimated error

PGRMM M: Map datum

PGRMZ Z: Altitude

SDDBT DBT: Depth below transducer

SDDPT DPT: Depth

SDMTW MTW: Water temperature

SDVHW VHW: Water speed and heading

Appendix 195

Receive

Sentence Description

DPT Depth

DBT Depth below transducer

MTW Water temperature

VHW Water speed and heading

WPL Waypoint location

DSC Digital selective calling information

DSE Expanded digital selective calling

HDG Heading, deviation, and variation

HDM Heading, magnetic

MWD Wind direction and speed

MDA Meteorological composite

MWV Wind speed and angle

VDM AIS VHF data-link message

You can purchase complete information about National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) format and

sentences from www.nmea.org.

196 Appendix

J1939 Information

The chartplotter can receive J1939 sentences. The chartplotter cannot transmit over the J1939 network.

Description PGN SPN

Engine percent load at current speed 61443 92

Engine speed 61444 190

Engine manifold exhaust gas temperature - right manifold 65031 2433

Engine manifold exhaust gas temperature - left manifold 65031 2434

Engine auxiliary coolant 65172

Active diagnostic trouble codes 65226

Vehicle distance 65248

Water in fuel indicator 65279

Engine wait to start lamp 65252 1081

Engine over speed test 65252 2812

Engine air shutoff command status 65252 2813

Engine alarm output command status 65252 2814

Engine total hours of operation 65253 247

Navigation-based vehicle speed 65256 517

Engine fuel temperature 1 65262 174

Engine oil temperature 1 65262 175

Engine fuel delivery pressure 65263 94

Engine oil pressure 65263 100

Engine coolant pressure 65263 109

Engine coolant temperature 65263 110

Engine coolant level 65263 111

Engine fuel rate 65266 183

Engine average fuel economy 65266 185

Engine intake manifold #1 pressure 65270 102

Battery potential / power input 1 65271 168

Transmission oil temperature 65272 177

Transmission oil pressure 65272 127

Fuel level 65276 96

Engine oil filter differential pressure 65276 969

Appendix 197

support.garmin.com

GUID-413FE004-9D7D-474E-8423-3B787BC4A5BF

v13

January 2025

Garmin 010-02322-02 GPSMAP 1222xsv Plus Marine Chartplotter

Product's Documents

Owner's manual

Specifications

Garmin 010-02322-02 Questions and Answers